ST72P334J4B [STMICROELECTRONICS]

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACES; 8位MCU单电压闪存, ADC , 16位定时器, SPI , SCI INTERFACES
ST72P334J4B
型号: ST72P334J4B
厂家: ST    ST
描述:

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACES
8位MCU单电压闪存, ADC , 16位定时器, SPI , SCI INTERFACES

闪存
文件: 总153页 (文件大小:1929K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
ST72334J/N,  
ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY,  
ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACES  
Memories  
– 8K or 16K Program memory (ROM or single  
voltage FLASH) with read-out protection and  
in-situ programming (remote ISP)  
– 256 bytes EEPROM Data memory (with read-  
out protection option in ROM devices)  
– 384 or 512 bytes RAM  
Clock, Reset and Supply Management  
PSDIP42  
PSDIP56  
– Enhanced reset system  
– Enhanced low voltage supply supervisor with  
3 programmable levels  
– Clock sources: crystal/ceramic resonator os-  
cillators or RC oscillators, external clock,  
backup Clock Security System  
– 4 Power Saving Modes: Halt, Active-Halt,  
Wait and Slow  
– Beep and clock-out capabilities  
Interrupt Management  
TQFP64  
14 x 14  
TQFP44  
10 x 10  
– 10 interrupt vectors plus TRAP and RESET  
– 15 external interrupt lines (4 vectors)  
44 or 32 I/O Ports  
1 Analog Peripheral  
– 44 or 32 multifunctional bidirectional I/O lines:  
– 21 or 19 alternate function lines  
– 12 or 8 high sink outputs  
– 8-bit ADC with 8 input channels (6 only on  
ST72334Jx, not available on ST72124J2)  
4 Timers  
Instruction Set  
– Configurable watchdog timer  
– Realtime base  
– Two 16-bit timers with: 2 input captures (only  
one on timer A), 2 output compares (only one  
on timer A), External clock input on timer A,  
PWM and Pulse generator modes  
– 8-bit data manipulation  
– 63 basic instructions  
– 17 main addressing modes  
– 8 x 8 unsigned multiply instruction  
– True bit manipulation  
2 Communications Interfaces  
– SPI synchronous serial interface  
– SCI asynchronous serial interface (LIN com-  
patible)  
Development Tools  
– Full hardware/software development package  
Device Summary  
Features  
ST72124J2 ST72314J2 ST72314J4 ST72314N2 ST72314N4 ST72334J2 ST72334J4 ST72334N2 ST72334N4  
Program memory - bytes  
RAM (stack) - bytes  
EEPROM - bytes  
8K  
8K  
16K  
512 (256)  
-
8K  
16K  
8K  
384 (256)  
256  
16K  
512 (256)  
256  
8K  
384 (256)  
256  
16K  
512 (256)  
256  
384 (256)  
-
384 (256)  
-
384 (256)  
512 (256)  
Watchdog, Two 16-bit Timers, SPI, SCI  
Peripherals  
-
ADC  
3.2V to 5.5V  
Operating Supply  
CPU Frequency  
Operating Temperature  
Packages  
Up to 8 MHz (with up to 16 MHz oscillator)  
-40°C to +85°C (-40°C to +105/125°C optional)  
TQFP64 / SDIP56 TQFP44 / SDIP42  
TQFP44 / SDIP42  
TQFP64 / SDIP56  
Rev. 2.5  
April 2003  
1/153  
1
Table of Contents  
1 PREAMBLE: ST72C334 VERSUS ST72E331 SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
3 PIN DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7  
4 REGISTER & MEMORY MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
5 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
5.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
5.2 MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
5.3 STRUCTURAL ORGANISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
5.4 IN-SITU PROGRAMMING (ISP) MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
5.5 MEMORY READ-OUT PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
6 DATA EEPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
6.2 MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
6.3 MEMORY ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
6.4 POWER SAVING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
6.5 ACCESS ERROR HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
6.6 REGISTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
7 DATA EEPROM Register Map and Reset Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
7.1 READ-OUT PROTECTION OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
8 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
8.2 MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
8.3 CPU REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
9 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
9.1 LOW VOLTAGE DETECTOR (LVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
9.2 RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (RSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
9.3 MULTI-OSCILLATOR (MO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
9.4 CLOCK SECURITY SYSTEM (CSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
9.5 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK REGISTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
10 INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
10.1 NON MASKABLE SOFTWARE INTERRUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
10.2 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
10.3 PERIPHERAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
11 POWER SAVING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
11.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
11.2 SLOW MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
11.3 WAIT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
11.4 ACTIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
12 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
12.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
12.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
12.3 I/O PORT IMPLEMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
2/153  
2
Table of Contents  
12.4 LOW POWER MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
12.5 INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
13 MISCELLANEOUS REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
13.1 I/O PORT INTERRUPT SENSITIVITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
13.2 I/O PORT ALTERNATE FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
13.3 REGISTERS DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
14 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
14.1 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
14.2 MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK TIMER (MCC/RTC) . . . . . . . 52  
14.3 16-BIT TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
14.4 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
14.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
14.6 8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
15 INSTRUCTION SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
15.1 ST7 ADDRESSING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
15.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
16 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
16.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
16.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
16.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
16.4 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
16.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
16.6 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
16.7 EMC CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
16.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
16.9 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131  
16.10 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
16.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
16.12 8-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138  
17 PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
17.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140  
17.2 SOLDERING AND GLUEABILITY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143  
18 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
18.1 OPTION BYTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
18.2 TRANSFER OF CUSTOMER CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
18.3 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
18.4 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
19 IMPORTANT NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
19.1 SCI BAUD RATE REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
20 SUMMARY OF CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152  
3/153  
3
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
To obtain the most recent version of this datasheet,  
please check at www.st.com>products>technical literature>datasheet.  
Please also pay special attention to the Section “IMPORTANT NOTES” on page 151  
4/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
1 PREAMBLE: ST72C334 VERSUS ST72E331 SPECIFICATION  
New Features available on the ST72C334  
or 16K FLASH/ROM with In-Situ  
New Memory Locations in ST72C334  
20h: MISCR register becomes MISCR1 register  
8  
Programming and Read-out protection  
(naming change)  
New ADC with a better accuracy and conversion  
29h: new control/status register for the MCC  
time  
module  
New configurable Clock, Reset and Supply  
2Bh: new control/status register for the Clock,  
Reset and Supply control. This register replaces  
the WDGSR register keeping the WDOGF flag  
compatibility.  
system  
New power saving mode with real time base:  
Active Halt  
40h: new MISCR2 register  
Beep capability on PF1  
New interrupt source: Clock security system  
(CSS) or Main clock controller (MCC)  
ST72C334 I/O Configuration and Pinout  
Same pinout as ST72E331  
PA6 and PA7 are true open drain I/O ports  
without pull-up (same as ST72E331)  
PA3, PB3, PB4 and PF2 have no pull-up  
configuration (all I/Os present on TQFP44)  
PA5:4, PC3:2, PE7:4 and PF7:6 have high sink  
capabilities (20mA on N-buffer, 2mA on P-buffer  
and pull-up). On the ST72E331, all these pads  
(except PA5:4) were 2mA push-pull pads  
without high sink capabilities. PA4 and PA5  
were 20mA true open drains.  
5/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
2 INTRODUCTION  
FLASH memory with byte-by-byte In-Situ Pro-  
gramming (ISP) capability.  
The ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N and ST72124J de-  
vices are members of the ST7 microcontroller fam-  
ily. They can be grouped as follows:  
Under software control, all devices can be placed  
in WAIT, SLOW, ACTIVE-HALT or HALT mode,  
reducing power consumption when the application  
is in idle or standby state.  
– ST72334J/N devices are designed for mid-range  
applications with Data EEPROM, ADC, SPI and  
SCI interface capabilities.  
The enhanced instruction set and addressing  
modes of the ST7 offer both power and flexibility to  
software developers, enabling the design of highly  
efficient and compact application code. In addition  
to standard 8-bit data management, all ST7 micro-  
controllers feature true bit manipulation, 8x8 un-  
signed multiplication and indirect addressing  
modes.  
– ST72314J/N devices target the same range of  
applications but without Data EEPROM.  
– ST72124J devices are for applications that do  
not need Data EEPROM and the ADC peripher-  
al.  
All devices are based on a common industry-  
standard 8-bit core, featuring an enhanced instruc-  
tion set.  
For easy reference, all parametric data are located  
in Section 16 on page 107.  
The  
ST72C334J/N,  
ST72C314J/N  
and  
ST72C124J versions feature single-voltage  
Figure 1. General Block Diagram  
8-BIT CORE  
ALU  
PROGRAM  
MEMORY  
(8K or 16K Bytes)  
RESET  
ISPSEL  
CONTROL  
RAM  
V
V
DD  
(384 or 512 Bytes)  
LVD  
SS  
EEPROM  
(256 Bytes)  
MULTI OSC  
+
CLOCK FILTER  
OSC1  
OSC2  
PA7:0  
PORT A  
MCC/RTC  
(8-BIT for N versions)  
(5-BIT for J versions)  
PB7:0  
PORT B  
PORT F  
TIMER A  
BEEP  
(8-BIT for N versions)  
(5-BIT for J versions)  
PF7,6,4,2:0  
(6-BIT)  
PORT C  
PC7:0  
TIMER B  
(8-BIT)  
SPI  
PORT E  
SCI  
PE7:0  
(6-BIT for N versions)  
PORT D  
(2-BIT for J versions)  
PD7:0  
(8-BIT for N versions)  
(6-BIT for J versions)  
8-BIT ADC  
WATCHDOG  
V
V
DDA  
SSA  
6/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
3 PIN DESCRIPTION  
Figure 2. 64-Pin TQFP Package Pinout (N versions)  
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49  
V
V
(HS) PE4  
1
(HS) PE5  
2
(HS) PE6  
3
(HS) PE7  
4
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
SS_1  
DD_1  
PA3  
PA2  
ei0  
PA1  
PB0  
5
PB1  
6
PB2  
7
PB3  
8
PA0  
ei2  
PC7 / SS  
PC6 / SCK / ISPCLK  
PC5 / MOSI  
PC4 / MISO / ISPDATA  
PC3 (HS) / ICAP1_B  
PC2 (HS) / ICAP2_B  
PC1 / OCMP1_B  
PC0 / OCMP2_B  
PB4  
9
PB5  
10  
ei3  
PB6  
PB7  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
AIN0 / PD0  
AIN1 / PD1  
AIN2 / PD2  
AIN3 / PD3  
ei1  
V
SS_0  
V
DD_0  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
ei  
associated external interrupt vector  
x
7/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)  
Figure 3. 56-Pin SDIP Package Pinout (N versions)  
1
PB4  
PB5  
PB3  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
PB2  
2
ei3  
ei2  
PB6  
PB1  
3
PB7  
PB0  
4
PE7 (HS)  
AIN0 / PD0  
AIN1 / PD1  
AIN2 / PD2  
AIN3 / PD3  
AIN4 / PD4  
AIN5 / PD5  
AIN6 / PD6  
AIN7 / PD7  
5
PE6 (HS)  
PE5 (HS)  
PE4 (HS)  
PE1 / RDI  
PE0 / TDO  
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
V
_2  
DD  
OSC1  
OSC2  
V
DDA  
V
V
_2  
SSA  
SS  
MCO / PF0  
BEEP / PF1  
RESET  
ISPSEL  
ei1  
PF2  
PA7 (HS)  
PA6 (HS)I  
PA5 (HS)  
PA4 (HS)  
OCMP1_A / PF4  
ICAP1_A / (HS) PF6  
EXTCLK_A / (HS) PF7  
V
V
V
DD_0  
SS_1  
V
SS_0  
DD_1  
OCMP2_B / PC0  
OCMP1_B / PC1  
PA3  
PA2  
ei0  
ICAP2_B / (HS) PC2  
ICAP1_B / (HS) PC3  
ISPDATA/ MISO / PC4  
MOSI / PC5  
PA1  
PA0  
PC7 / SS  
PC6 / SCK / ISPCLK  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
ei associated external interrupt vector  
x
8/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)  
Figure 4. 44-Pin TQFP and 42-Pin SDIP Package Pinouts (J versions)  
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34  
PE1 / RDI  
PB0  
V
V
1
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
SS_1  
DD_1  
2
PB1  
PA3  
3
ei0  
ei2  
ei3  
PB2  
PC7 / SS  
4
PB3  
PC6 / SCK / ISPCLK  
PC5 / MOSI  
5
PB4  
6
AIN0 / PD0  
AIN1 / PD1  
AIN2 / PD2  
AIN3 / PD3  
AIN4 / PD4  
PC4 / MISO / ISPDATA  
PC3 (HS) / ICAP1_B  
PC2 (HS) / ICAP2_B  
PC1 / OCMP1_B  
PC0 / OCMP2_B  
7
8
9
ei1  
10  
11  
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22  
1
PB4  
EI3  
PB3  
PB2  
PB1  
PB0  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
AIN0 / PD0  
AIN1 / PD1  
AIN2 / PD2  
AIN3 / PD3  
AIN4 / PD4  
AIN5 / PD5  
2
ei2  
3
4
PE1 / RDI  
PE0 / TDO  
5
6
V
_2  
7
DD  
V
OSC1  
OSC2  
8
DDA  
V
9
SSA  
MCO / PF0  
BEEP / PF1  
V
_2  
SS  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
RESET  
ei1  
PF2  
ISPSEL  
OCMP1_A / PF4  
ICAP1_A / (HS) PF6  
EXTCLK_A / (HS) PF7  
OCMP2_B / PC0  
PA7 (HS)  
PA6 (HS)  
PA5 (HS)  
PA4 (HS)  
OCMP1_B / PC1  
ICAP2_B/ (HS) PC2  
ICAP1_B / (HS) PC3  
ISPDATA / MISO / PC4  
MOSI / PC5  
V
SS_1  
V
DD_1  
PA3  
ei0  
PC7 / SS  
PC6 / SCK / ISPCLK  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
ei associated external interrupt vector  
x
9/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)  
For external pin connection guidelines, refer to Section 16 "ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS" on page  
107.  
Legend / Abbreviations for Table 1:  
Type:  
I = input, O = output, S = supply  
A = Dedicated analog input  
Input level:  
In/Output level: C = CMOS 0.3V /0.7V  
,
DD  
DD  
C = CMOS 0.3V /0.7V with input trigger  
T
DD  
DD  
Output level:  
HS = 20mA high sink (on N-buffer only)  
Port and control configuration:  
1)  
– Input:  
float = floating, wpu = weak pull-up, int = interrupt , ana = analog  
2)  
– Output:  
OD = open drain , PP = push-pull  
Refer to Section 12 "I/O PORTS" on page 39 for more details on the software configuration of the I/O  
ports.  
The RESET configuration of each pin is shown in bold. This configuration is valid as long as the device is  
in reset state.  
Table 1. Device Pin Description  
Pin n°  
Level  
Port  
Main  
function  
(after  
Input  
Output  
Pin Name  
Alternate function  
reset)  
1 49  
PE4 (HS)  
I/O C HS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port E4  
Port E5  
Port E6  
Port E7  
Port B0  
Port B1  
Port B2  
Port B3  
Port B4  
Port B5  
Port B6  
Port B7  
T
2 50  
3 51  
4 52  
PE5 (HS)  
PE6 (HS)  
PE7 (HS)  
I/O C HS  
X
T
I/O C HS  
X
T
I/O C HS  
X
T
5 53 2 39 PB0  
6 54 3 40 PB1  
7 55 4 41 PB2  
8 56 5 42 PB3  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
S
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
ei2  
ei2  
ei2  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
ei2  
ei3  
ei3  
9
1
6
1
PB4  
10 2  
11 3  
12 4  
13 5  
14 6  
15 7  
PB5  
PB6  
ei3  
ei3  
PB7  
7
8
9
2
3
4
PD0/AIN0  
PD1/AIN1  
PD2/AIN2  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port D0 ADC Analog Input 0  
Port D1 ADC Analog Input 1  
Port D2 ADC Analog Input 2  
Port D3 ADC Analog Input 3  
Port D4 ADC Analog Input 4  
Port D5 ADC Analog Input 5  
Port D6 ADC Analog Input 6  
Port D7 ADC Analog Input 7  
Analog Power Supply Voltage  
Analog Ground Voltage  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
16 8 10 5 PD3/AIN3  
17 9 11 6 PD4/AIN4  
18 10 12 7 PD5/AIN5  
19 11  
PD6/AIN6  
PD7/AIN7  
20 12  
21 13 13 8  
22 14 14 9  
23  
V
V
V
DDA  
SSA  
S
S
Digital Main Supply Voltage  
DD_3  
10/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Pin n°  
Level  
Port  
Main  
function  
(after  
Input  
Output  
Pin Name  
Alternate function  
reset)  
24  
V
S
Digital Ground Voltage  
Port F0 Main clock output (f  
Port F1 Beep signal output  
Port F2  
SS_3  
25 15 15 10 PF0/MCO  
26 16 16 11 PF1/BEEP  
27 17 17 12 PF2  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
C
C
C
X
X
X
ei1  
ei1  
X
X
X
X
X
X
/2)  
OSC  
T
T
T
ei1  
28  
29 18 18 13 PF4/OCMP1_A  
30 NC  
31 19 19 14 PF6 (HS)/ICAP1_A  
32 20 20 15 PF7 (HS)/EXTCLK_A I/O C HS  
NC  
Not Connected  
Port F4 Timer A Output Compare 1  
Not Connected  
I/O  
C
X
X
X
X
T
I/O C HS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port F6 Timer A Input Capture 1  
T
X
Port F7 Timer A External Clock Source  
Digital Main Supply Voltage  
Digital Ground Voltage  
Port C0 Timer B Output Compare 2  
Port C1 Timer B Output Compare 1  
Port C2 Timer B Input Capture 2  
Port C3 Timer B Input Capture 1  
Port C4 SPI Master In / Slave Out Data  
Port C5 SPI Master Out / Slave In Data  
Port C6 SPI Serial Clock  
Port C7 SPI Slave Select (active low)  
Port A0  
T
33 21 21  
34 22 22  
V
V
S
S
DD_0  
SS_0  
35 23 23 16 PC0/OCMP2_B  
36 24 24 17 PC1/OCMP1_B  
37 25 25 18 PC2 (HS)/ICAP2_B  
38 26 26 19 PC3 (HS)/ICAP1_B  
39 27 27 20 PC4/MISO  
I/O  
I/O  
C
C
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
T
I/O C HS  
T
I/O C HS  
T
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
S
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
40 28 28 21 PC5/MOSI  
41 29 29 22 PC6/SCK  
42 30 30 23 PC7/SS  
43 31  
44 32  
45 33  
PA0  
PA1  
PA2  
ei0  
ei0  
ei0  
Port A1  
Port A2  
46 34 31 24 PA3  
ei0  
Port A3  
47 35 32 25 V  
48 36 33 26 V  
Digital Main Supply Voltage  
Digital Ground Voltage  
Port A4  
DD_1  
SS_1  
S
49 37 34 27 PA4 (HS)  
50 38 35 28 PA5 (HS)  
51 39 36 29 PA6 (HS)  
52 40 37 30 PA7 (HS)  
I/O C HS  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
T
X
X
T
I/O C HS  
X
Port A5  
T
I/O C HS  
Port A6  
T
I/O C HS  
Port A7  
T
Must be tied low in user mode. In pro-  
gramming mode when available, this pin  
acts as In-Situ Programming mode se-  
lection.  
53 41 38 31 ISPSEL  
I
Top priority non maskable interrupt (ac-  
tive low)  
54 42 39 32 RESET  
I/O  
C
X
X
55  
56  
NC  
NC  
Not Connected  
Digital Ground Voltage  
57 43 40 33 V  
S
SS_3  
Resonator oscillator inverter output or  
capacitor input for RC oscillator  
3)  
58 44 41 34 OSC2  
O
11/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Pin n°  
Level  
Port  
Main  
function  
(after  
Input  
Output  
Pin Name  
Alternate function  
reset)  
External clock input or Resonator oscilla-  
tor inverter input or resistor input for RC  
oscillator  
3)  
59 45 42 35 OSC1  
60 46 43 36 V  
I
S
Digital Main Supply Voltage  
Port E0 SCI Transmit Data Out  
Port E1 SCI Receive Data In  
DD_3  
61 47 44 37 PE0/TDO  
62 48 1 38 PE1/RDI  
I/O  
I/O  
C
C
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
T
63  
64  
NC  
NC  
Not Connected  
Notes:  
1. In the interrupt input column, “ei ” defines the associated external interrupt vector. If the weak pull-up  
x
column (wpu) is merged with the interrupt column (int), then the I/O configuration is pull-up interrupt input,  
else the configuration is floating interrupt input.  
2. In the open drain output column, “T” defines a true open drain I/O (P-Buffer and protection diode to V  
are not implemented). See Section 12 "I/O PORTS" on page 39 and Section 16.8 "I/O PORT PIN CHAR-  
ACTERISTICS" on page 128 for more details.  
DD  
3. OSC1 and OSC2 pins connect a crystal or ceramic resonator, an external RC, or an external source to  
the on-chip oscillator see Section 3 "PIN DESCRIPTION" on page 7 and Section 16.5 "CLOCK AND TIM-  
ING CHARACTERISTICS" on page 116 for more details.  
12/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
4 REGISTER & MEMORY MAP  
As shown in the Figure 5, the MCU is capable of  
addressing 64K bytes of memories and I/O regis-  
ters.  
space includes up to 256 bytes for the stack from  
0100h to 01FFh.  
The highest address bytes contain the user reset  
and interrupt vectors.  
The available memory locations consist of 128  
bytes of register locations, 384 or 512 bytes of  
RAM, up to 256 bytes of data EEPROM and 4 or  
8 Kbytes of user program memory. The RAM  
IMPORTANT: Memory locations marked as “Re-  
served” must never be accessed. Accessing a re-  
served area can have unpredictable effects on the  
device.  
Figure 5. Memory Map  
0080h  
0000h  
Short Addressing RAM  
HW Registers  
(see Table 2)  
Zero page  
(128 Bytes)  
00FFh  
007Fh  
0080h  
Stack or  
16-bit Addressing RAM  
(256 Bytes)  
0100h  
01FFh  
384 Bytes RAM  
01FFh  
512 Bytes RAM  
027Fh  
0080h  
Short Addressing RAM  
Zero page  
0200h / 0280h  
Reserved  
00FFh  
0100h  
(128 Bytes)  
0BFFh  
0C00h  
Stack or  
16-bit Addressing RAM  
(256 Bytes)  
256 Bytes Data EEPROM  
0CFFh  
01FFh  
0200h  
0D00h  
Reserved  
16-bit Addressing  
RAM  
BFFFh  
027Fh  
C000h  
C000h  
16K Bytes  
E000h  
8K Bytes  
Program  
Memory  
Program  
Memory  
16 KBytes  
8 KBytes  
FFDFh  
FFE0h  
E000h  
FFFFh  
Interrupt & Reset Vectors  
(see Table 5 on page 34)  
FFFFh  
13/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
REGISTER & MEMORY MAP (Cont’d)  
Table 2. Hardware Register Map  
Register  
Label  
Reset  
Status  
Address  
Block  
Register Name  
Remarks  
1)  
0000h  
0001h  
0002h  
PADR  
PADDR  
PAOR  
Port A Data Register  
Port A Data Direction Register  
Port A Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Port A  
00h  
00h  
2)  
0003h  
Reserved Area (1 Byte)  
1)  
0004h  
0005h  
0006h  
PCDR  
PCDDR  
PCOR  
Port C Data Register  
Port C Data Direction Register  
Port C Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Port C  
Port B  
00h  
00h  
0007h  
Reserved Area (1 Byte)  
1)  
R/W  
R/W  
0008h  
0009h  
000Ah  
PBDR  
PBDDR  
PBOR  
Port B Data Register  
Port B Data Direction Register  
Port B Option Register  
00h  
00h  
00h  
2)  
2)  
2)  
R/W  
000Bh  
Reserved Area (1 Byte)  
1)  
000Ch  
000Dh  
000Eh  
PEDR  
PEDDR  
PEOR  
Port E Data Register  
Port E Data Direction Register  
Port E Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Port E  
Port D  
Port F  
00h  
00h  
000Fh  
Reserved Area (1 Byte)  
1)  
0010h  
0011h  
0012h  
PDDR  
PDDDR  
PDOR  
Port D Data Register  
Port D Data Direction Register  
Port D Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
00h  
00h  
0013h  
Reserved Area (1 Byte)  
1)  
0014h  
0015h  
0016h  
PFDR  
PFDDR  
PFOR  
Port F Data Register  
Port F Data Direction Register  
Port F Option Register  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
00h  
00h  
0017h  
to  
001Fh  
Reserved Area (9 Bytes)  
Miscellaneous Register 1  
0020h  
MISCR1  
00h  
R/W  
0021h  
0022h  
0023h  
SPIDR  
SPICR  
SPISR  
SPI Data I/O Register  
SPI Control Register  
SPI Status Register  
xxh  
0xh  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
Read Only  
SPI  
0024h  
to  
Reserved Area (5 Bytes)  
0028h  
0029h  
MCC  
MCCSR  
Main Clock Control / Status Register  
01h  
R/W  
14/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Register  
Label  
Reset  
Status  
Address  
Block  
Register Name  
Remarks  
002Ah  
002Bh  
002Ch  
WATCHDOG WDGCR  
CRSR  
Watchdog Control Register  
7Fh  
R/W  
Clock, Reset, Supply Control / Status Register 000x 000x R/W  
Data-EEPROM EECSR  
Data-EEPROM Control/Status Register  
Reserved Area (4 Bytes)  
00h  
R/W  
002Dh  
0030h  
0031h  
0032h  
0033h  
0034h  
0035h  
0036h  
0037h  
0038h  
0039h  
003Ah  
003Bh  
003Ch  
003Dh  
003Eh  
003Fh  
TACR2  
TACR1  
TASR  
TAIC1HR  
TAIC1LR  
TAOC1HR  
TAOC1LR  
TACHR  
TACLR  
TAACHR  
TAACLR  
TAIC2HR  
TAIC2LR  
TAOC2HR  
TAOC2LR  
Timer A Control Register 2  
Timer A Control Register 1  
Timer A Status Register  
Timer A Input Capture 1 High Register  
Timer A Input Capture 1 Low Register  
Timer A Output Compare 1 High Register  
Timer A Output Compare 1 Low Register  
Timer A Counter High Register  
00h  
00h  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
FFh  
FCh  
FFh  
FCh  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
R/W  
TIMER A  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Timer A Counter Low Register  
Timer A Alternate Counter High Register  
Timer A Alternate Counter Low Register  
Timer A Input Capture 2 High Register  
Timer A Input Capture 2 Low Register  
Timer A Output Compare 2 High Register  
Timer A Output Compare 2 Low Register  
3)  
3)  
3)  
R/W  
R/W  
3)  
0040h  
MISCR2  
Miscellaneous Register 2  
00h  
R/W  
0041h  
0042h  
0043h  
0044h  
0045h  
0046h  
0047h  
0048h  
0049h  
004Ah  
004Bh  
004Ch  
004Dh  
004Eh  
004Fh  
TBCR2  
TBCR1  
TBSR  
TBIC1HR  
TBIC1LR  
TBOC1HR  
TBOC1LR  
TBCHR  
Timer B Control Register 2  
Timer B Control Register 1  
Timer B Status Register  
Timer B Input Capture 1 High Register  
Timer B Input Capture 1 Low Register  
Timer B Output Compare 1 High Register  
Timer B Output Compare 1 Low Register  
Timer B Counter High Register  
00h  
00h  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
FFh  
FCh  
FFh  
FCh  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
R/W  
TIMER B  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
TBCLR  
Timer B Counter Low Register  
TBACHR  
TBACLR  
TBIC2HR  
TBIC2LR  
TBOC2HR  
TBOC2LR  
Timer B Alternate Counter High Register  
Timer B Alternate Counter Low Register  
Timer B Input Capture 2 High Register  
Timer B Input Capture 2 Low Register  
Timer B Output Compare 2 High Register  
Timer B Output Compare 2 Low Register  
R/W  
0050h  
0051h  
0052h  
0053h  
0054h  
0055h  
0056h  
0057h  
SCISR  
SCIDR  
SCIBRR  
SCICR1  
SCICR2  
SCIERPR  
SCI Status Register  
SCI Data Register  
SCI Baud Rate Register  
SCI Control Register 1  
SCI Control Register 2  
SCI Extended Receive Prescaler Register  
Reserved area  
SCI Extended Transmit Prescaler Register  
C0h  
xxh  
Read Only  
R/W  
00xx xxxx R/W  
xxh  
00h  
00h  
---  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
SCI  
SCIETPR  
00h  
R/W  
15/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Register  
Label  
Reset  
Status  
Address  
Block  
Register Name  
Remarks  
0058h  
006Fh  
Reserved Area (24 Bytes)  
0070h  
0071h  
ADCDR  
ADCCSR  
Data Register  
Control/Status Register  
xxh  
00h  
Read Only  
R/W  
ADC  
0072h  
to  
Reserved Area (14 Bytes)  
007Fh  
Legend: x=undefined, R/W=read/write  
Notes:  
1. The contents of the I/O port DR registers are readable only in output configuration. In input configura-  
tion, the values of the I/O pins are returned instead of the DR register contents.  
2. The bits corresponding to unavailable pins are forced to 1 by hardware, affecting accordingly the reset  
status value. These bits must always keep their reset value.  
3. External pin not available.  
16/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
5 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY  
5.1 INTRODUCTION  
This mode needs five signals (plus the V signal  
if necessary) to be connected to the programming  
tool. This signals are:  
DD  
FLASH devices have a single voltage non-volatile  
FLASH memory that may be programmed in-situ  
(or plugged in a programming tool) on a byte-by-  
byte basis.  
– RESET: device reset  
– V : device ground power supply  
SS  
– ISPCLK: ISP output serial clock pin  
– ISPDATA: ISP input serial data pin  
5.2 MAIN FEATURES  
– ISPSEL: Remote ISP mode selection. This pin  
must be connected to V on the application  
Remote In-Situ Programming (ISP) mode  
Up to 16 bytes programmed in the same cycle  
MTP memory (Multiple Time Programmable)  
Read-out memory protection against piracy  
SS  
board through a pull-down resistor.  
If any of these pins are used for other purposes on  
the application, a serial resistor has to be imple-  
mented to avoid a conflict if the other device forces  
the signal level.  
5.3 STRUCTURAL ORGANISATION  
Figure 6 shows a typical hardware interface to a  
standard ST7 programming tool. For more details  
on the pin locations, refer to the device pinout de-  
scription.  
The FLASH program memory is organised in a  
single 8-bit wide memory block which can be used  
for storing both code and data constants.  
Figure 6. Typical Remote ISP Interface  
The FLASH program memory is mapped in the up-  
per part of the ST7 addressing space and includes  
the reset and interrupt user vector area .  
HE10 CONNECTOR TYPE  
TO PROGRAMMING TOOL  
XTAL  
5.4 IN-SITU PROGRAMMING (ISP) MODE  
1
C
C
L1  
L0  
The FLASH program memory can be programmed  
using Remote ISP mode. This ISP mode allows  
the contents of the ST7 program memory to be up-  
dated using a standard ST7 programming tools af-  
ter the device is mounted on the application board.  
This feature can be implemented with a minimum  
number of added components and board area im-  
pact.  
ISPSEL  
10KΩ  
V
SS  
RESET  
ISPCLK  
An example Remote ISP hardware interface to the  
standard ST7 programming tool is described be-  
low. For more details on ISP programming, refer to  
the ST7 Programming Specification.  
ST7  
ISPDATA  
47KΩ  
Remote ISP Overview  
The Remote ISP mode is initiated by a specific se-  
quence on the dedicated ISPSEL pin.  
APPLICATION  
The Remote ISP is performed in three steps:  
– Selection of the RAM execution mode  
– Download of Remote ISP code in RAM  
5.5 MEMORY READ-OUT PROTECTION  
The read-out protection is enabled through an op-  
tion bit.  
– Execution of Remote ISP code in RAM to pro-  
gram the user program into the FLASH  
For FLASH devices, when this option is selected,  
the program and data stored in the FLASH memo-  
ry are protected against read-out piracy (including  
a re-write protection). When this protection option  
is removed the entire FLASH program memory is  
first automatically erased. However, the E PROM  
data memory (when available) can be protected  
Remote ISP hardware configuration  
In Remote ISP mode, the ST7 has to be supplied  
2
with power (V and V ) and a clock signal (os-  
DD  
SS  
cillator and application crystal circuit for example).  
only with ROM devices.  
17/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
6 DATA EEPROM  
6.1 INTRODUCTION  
6.2 MAIN FEATURES  
The Electrically Erasable Programmable Read  
Only Memory can be used as a non volatile back-  
up for storing data. Using the EEPROM requires a  
basic access protocol described in this chapter.  
Up to 16 Bytes programmed in the same cycle  
EEPROM mono-voltage (charge pump)  
Chained erase and programming cycles  
Internal control of the global programming cycle  
duration  
End of programming cycle interrupt flag  
WAIT mode management  
Figure 7. EEPROM Block Diagram  
FALLING  
EDGE  
DETECTOR  
EEPROM INTERRUPT  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
PUMP  
RESERVED  
EEPROM  
EECSR  
0
0
0
0
0
IE LAT PGM  
EEPROM  
ROW  
ADDRESS  
DECODER  
4
MEMORY MATRIX  
(1 ROW = 16 x 8 BITS)  
DECODER  
128  
128  
DATA  
MULTIPLEXER  
16 x 8 BITS  
4
4
DATA LATCHES  
ADDRESS BUS  
DATA BUS  
18/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
DATA EEPROM (Cont’d)  
6.3 MEMORY ACCESS  
When PGM bit is set by the software, all the previ-  
ous bytes written in the data latches (up to 16) are  
programmed in the EEPROM cells. The effective  
high address (row) is determined by the last EEP-  
ROM write sequence. To avoid wrong program-  
ming, the user must take care that all the bytes  
written between two programming sequences  
have the same high address: only the four Least  
Significant Bits of the address can change.  
The Data EEPROM memory read/write access  
modes are controlled by the LAT bit of the EEP-  
ROM Control/Status register (EECSR). The flow-  
chart in Figure 8 describes these different memory  
access modes.  
Read Operation (LAT=0)  
The EEPROM can be read as a normal ROM loca-  
tion when the LAT bit of the EECSR register is  
cleared. In a read cycle, the byte to be accessed is  
put on the data bus in less than 1 CPU clock cycle.  
This means that reading data from EEPROM  
takes the same time as reading data from  
EPROM, but this memory cannot be used to exe-  
cute machine code.  
At the end of the programming cycle, the PGM and  
LAT bits are cleared simultaneously, and an inter-  
rupt is generated if the IE bit is set. The Data EEP-  
ROM interrupt request is cleared by hardware  
when the Data EEPROM interrupt vector is  
fetched.  
Note: Care should be taken during the program-  
ming cycle. Writing to the same memory location  
will over-program the memory (logical AND be-  
tween the two write access data result) because  
the data latches are only cleared at the end of the  
programming cycle and by the falling edge of LAT  
bit.  
Write Operation (LAT=1)  
To access the write mode, the LAT bit has to be  
set by software (the PGM bit remains cleared).  
When a write access to the EEPROM area occurs,  
the value is latched inside the 16 data latches ac-  
cording to its address.  
It is not possible to read the latched data.  
This note is ilustrated by the Figure 9.  
Figure 8. Data EEPROM Programming Flowchart  
READ MODE  
LAT=0  
WRITE MODE  
LAT=1  
PGM=0  
PGM=0  
WRITE UP TO 16 BYTES  
IN EEPROM AREA  
(with the same 11 MSB of the address)  
READ BYTES  
IN EEPROM AREA  
START PROGRAMMING CYCLE  
LAT=1  
PGM=1 (set by software)  
INTERRUPT GENERATION  
IF IE=1  
0
1
LAT  
CLEARED BY HARDWARE  
19/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
DATA EEPROM (Cont’d)  
6.4 POWER SAVING MODES  
Wait mode  
6.5 ACCESS ERROR HANDLING  
If a read access occurs while LAT=1, then the data  
bus will not be driven.  
The DATA EEPROM can enter WAIT mode on ex-  
ecution of the WFI instruction of the microcontrol-  
ler. The DATA EEPROM will immediately enter  
this mode if there is no programming in progress,  
otherwise the DATA EEPROM will finish the cycle  
and then enter WAIT mode.  
If a write access occurs while LAT=0, then the  
data on the bus will not be latched.  
If a programming cycle is interrupted (by software/  
RESET action), the memory data will not be guar-  
anteed.  
Halt mode  
The DATA EEPROM immediatly enters HALT  
mode if the microcontroller executes the HALT in-  
struction. Therefore the EEPROM will stop the  
function in progress, and data may be corrupted.  
Figure 9. Data EEPROM Programming Cycle  
READ OPERATION NOT POSSIBLE  
READ OPERATION POSSIBLE  
INTERNAL  
PROGRAMMING  
VOLTAGE  
ERASE CYCLE  
WRITE CYCLE  
WRITE OF  
DATA LATCHES  
tPROG  
LAT  
PGM  
EEPROM INTERRUPT  
20/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
DATA EEPROM (Cont’d)  
6.6 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Bit 1 = LAT Latch Access Transfer  
This bit is set by software. It is cleared by hard-  
ware at the end of the programming cycle. It can  
only be cleared by software if PGM bit is cleared.  
0: Read mode  
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (CSR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
1: Write mode  
7
0
Bit 0 = PGM Programming control and status  
This bit is set by software to begin the programming  
cycle. At the end of the programming cycle, this bit  
isclearedbyhardware andan interruptisgenerated  
if the ITE bit is set.  
0
0
0
0
0
IE  
LAT  
PGM  
Bit 7:3 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.  
0: Programming finished or not yet started  
1: Programming cycle is in progress  
Bit 2 = IE Interrupt enable  
This bitissetand cleared bysoftware. Itenables the  
Data EEPROM interrupt capability when the PGM  
bit is cleared by hardware. The interrupt request is  
automatically cleared when the software enters the  
interrupt routine.  
Note: if the PGM bit is cleared during the program-  
ming cycle, the memory data is not guaranteed  
0: Interrupt disabled  
1: Interrupt enabled  
21/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
7 DATA EEPROM Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
EECSR  
IE  
0
RWM  
0
PGM  
0
002Ch  
0
0
0
0
0
Reset Value  
7.1 READ-OUT PROTECTION OPTION  
The Data EEPROM can be optionally read-out  
protected in ST72334 ROM devices (see option  
list on page 146). ST72C334 Flash devices do not  
have this protection option.  
22/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
8 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT  
8.1 INTRODUCTION  
Accumulator (A)  
The Accumulator is an 8-bit general purpose reg-  
ister used to hold operands and the results of the  
arithmetic and logic calculations and to manipulate  
data.  
This CPU has a full 8-bit architecture and contains  
six internal registers allowing efficient 8-bit data  
manipulation.  
Index Registers (X and Y)  
8.2 MAIN FEATURES  
In indexed addressing modes, these 8-bit registers  
are used to create either effective addresses or  
temporary storage areas for data manipulation.  
(The Cross-Assembler generates a precede in-  
struction (PRE) to indicate that the following in-  
struction refers to the Y register.)  
63 basic instructions  
Fast 8-bit by 8-bit multiply  
17 main addressing modes  
Two 8-bit index registers  
16-bit stack pointer  
The Y register is not affected by the interrupt auto-  
matic procedures (not pushed to and popped from  
the stack).  
Low power modes  
Maskable hardware interrupts  
Non-maskable software interrupt  
Program Counter (PC)  
The program counter is a 16-bit register containing  
the address of the next instruction to be executed  
by the CPU. It is made of two 8-bit registers PCL  
(Program Counter Low which is the LSB) and PCH  
(Program Counter High which is the MSB).  
8.3 CPU REGISTERS  
The 6 CPU registers shown in Figure 10 are not  
present in the memory mapping and are accessed  
by specific instructions.  
Figure 10. CPU Registers  
7
0
ACCUMULATOR  
RESET VALUE = XXh  
7
0
0
X INDEX REGISTER  
Y INDEX REGISTER  
RESET VALUE = XXh  
7
RESET VALUE = XXh  
PCL  
PCH  
7
8
15  
0
PROGRAM COUNTER  
RESET VALUE = RESET VECTOR @ FFFEh-FFFFh  
7
1
0
H I N Z C  
X 1 X X X  
1
1
1
1
CONDITION CODE REGISTER  
RESET VALUE =  
8
1
15  
7
0
STACK POINTER  
RESET VALUE = STACK HIGHER ADDRESS  
X = Undefined Value  
23/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CPU REGISTERS (Cont’d)  
CONDITION CODE REGISTER (CC)  
Read/Write  
Bit 2 = N Negative.  
Reset Value: 111x1xxx  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. It is repre-  
sentative of the result sign of the last arithmetic,  
logical or data manipulation. It is a copy of the 7  
7
0
th  
bit of the result.  
1
1
1
H
I
N
Z
C
0: The result of the last operation is positive or null.  
1: The result of the last operation is negative  
(i.e. the most significant bit is a logic 1).  
The 8-bit Condition Code register contains the in-  
terrupt mask and four flags representative of the  
result of the instruction just executed. This register  
can also be handled by the PUSH and POP in-  
structions.  
This bit is accessed by the JRMI and JRPL instruc-  
tions.  
These bits can be individually tested and/or con-  
trolled by specific instructions.  
Bit 1 = Z Zero.  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. This bit in-  
dicates that the result of the last arithmetic, logical  
or data manipulation is zero.  
0: The result of the last operation is different from  
zero.  
Bit 4 = H Half carry.  
This bit is set by hardware when a carry occurs be-  
tween bits 3 and 4 of the ALU during an ADD or  
ADC instruction. It is reset by hardware during the  
same instructions.  
0: No half carry has occurred.  
1: A half carry has occurred.  
1: The result of the last operation is zero.  
This bit is accessed by the JREQ and JRNE test  
instructions.  
This bit is tested using the JRH or JRNH instruc-  
tion. The H bit is useful in BCD arithmetic subrou-  
tines.  
Bit 0 = C Carry/borrow.  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware and soft-  
ware. It indicates an overflow or an underflow has  
occurred during the last arithmetic operation.  
0: No overflow or underflow has occurred.  
1: An overflow or underflow has occurred.  
Bit 3 = I Interrupt mask.  
This bit is set by hardware when entering in inter-  
rupt or by software to disable all interrupts except  
the TRAP software interrupt. This bit is cleared by  
software.  
This bit is driven by the SCF and RCF instructions  
and tested by the JRC and JRNC instructions. It is  
also affected by the “bit test and branch”, shift and  
rotate instructions.  
0: Interrupts are enabled.  
1: Interrupts are disabled.  
This bit is controlled by the RIM, SIM and IRET in-  
structions and is tested by the JRM and JRNM in-  
structions.  
Note: Interrupts requested while I is set are  
latched and can be processed when I is cleared.  
By default an interrupt routine is not interruptable  
because the I bit is set by hardware at the start of  
the routine and reset by the IRET instruction at the  
end of the routine. If the I bit is cleared by software  
in the interrupt routine, pending interrupts are  
serviced regardless of the priority level of the cur-  
rent interrupt routine.  
24/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (Cont’d)  
Stack Pointer (SP)  
The least significant byte of the Stack Pointer  
(called S) can be directly accessed by a LD in-  
struction.  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 01 FFh  
Note: When the lower limit is exceeded, the Stack  
Pointer wraps around to the stack upper limit, with-  
out indicating the stack overflow. The previously  
stored information is then overwritten and there-  
fore lost. The stack also wraps in case of an under-  
flow.  
15  
8
1
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The stack is used to save the return address dur-  
ing a subroutine call and the CPU context during  
an interrupt. The user may also directly manipulate  
the stack by means of the PUSH and POP instruc-  
tions. In the case of an interrupt, the PCL is stored  
at the first location pointed to by the SP. Then the  
other registers are stored in the next locations as  
shown in Figure 11.  
SP7  
SP6  
SP5  
SP4  
SP3  
SP2  
SP1  
SP0  
The Stack Pointer is a 16-bit register which is al-  
ways pointing to the next free location in the stack.  
It is then decremented after data has been pushed  
onto the stack and incremented before data is  
popped from the stack (see Figure 11).  
– When an interrupt is received, the SP is decre-  
mented and the context is pushed on the stack.  
Since the stack is 256 bytes deep, the 8th most  
significant bits are forced by hardware. Following  
an MCU Reset, or after a Reset Stack Pointer in-  
struction (RSP), the Stack Pointer contains its re-  
set value (the SP7 to SP0 bits are set) which is the  
stack higher address.  
– On return from interrupt, the SP is incremented  
and the context is popped from the stack.  
A subroutine call occupies two locations and an in-  
terrupt five locations in the stack area.  
Figure 11. Stack Manipulation Example  
CALL  
Subroutine  
RET  
or RSP  
PUSH Y  
POP Y  
IRET  
Interrupt  
Event  
@ 0100h  
SP  
SP  
SP  
Y
CC  
A
CC  
A
CC  
A
X
X
X
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
SP  
SP  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
SP  
@ 01FFh  
Stack Higher Address = 01FFh  
0100h  
Stack Lower Address =  
25/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
9 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK MANAGEMENT  
The ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N and ST72124J mi-  
crocontrollers include a range of utility features for  
securing the application in critical situations (for  
example in case of a power brown-out), and re-  
ducing the number of external components. An  
overview is shown in Figure 12.  
Multi-Oscillator (MO)  
– 4 Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators  
– 1 External RC oscillator  
– 1 Internal RC oscillator  
Clock Security System (CSS)  
– Clock Filter  
– Backup Safe Oscillator  
See Section 16 "ELECTRICAL CHARACTERIS-  
TICS" on page 107 for more details.  
Main Features  
Supply Manager with main supply low voltage  
detection (LVD)  
Reset Sequence Manager (RSM)  
Figure 12. Clock, Reset and Supply Block Diagram  
CLOCK SECURITY SYSTEM  
(CSS)  
MULTI-  
OSCILLATOR  
(MO)  
f
OSC2  
OSC1  
TO  
OSC  
CLOCK  
FILTER  
SAFE  
OSC  
MAIN CLOCK  
CONTROLLER  
RESET SEQUENCE  
MANAGER  
FROM  
RESET  
WATCHDOG  
PERIPHERAL  
(RSM)  
VDD  
VSS  
LOW VOLTAGE  
DETECTOR  
(LVD)  
LVD  
CSS  
WDG  
RF  
CRSR  
0
0
0
RF  
0
IE  
D
CSS INTERRUPT  
26/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
9.1 LOW VOLTAGE DETECTOR (LVD)  
To allow the integration of power management  
features in the application, the Low Voltage Detec-  
tor function (LVD) generates a static reset when  
In these conditions, secure operation is always en-  
sured for the application without the need for ex-  
ternal reset hardware.  
the V  
supply voltage is below a V reference  
DD  
IT-  
During a Low Voltage Detector Reset, the RESET  
pin is held low, thus permitting the MCU to reset  
other devices.  
value. This means that it secures the power-up as  
well as the power-down keeping the ST7 in reset.  
The V reference value for a voltage drop is lower  
IT-  
Notes:  
than the V reference value for power-on in order  
1. The LVD allows the device to be used without  
any external RESET circuitry.  
IT+  
to avoid a parasitic reset when the MCU starts run-  
ning and sinks current on the supply (hysteresis).  
2. Three different reference levels are selectable  
through the option byte according to the applica-  
tion requirement.  
The LVD Reset circuitry generates a reset when  
V
is below:  
DD  
LVD application note  
– V when V is rising  
IT+  
DD  
– V when V is falling  
The LVD function is illustrated in the Figure 13.  
Application software can detect a reset caused by  
the LVD by reading the LVDRF bit in the CRSR  
register.  
IT-  
DD  
Provided the minimum V value (guaranteed for  
DD  
This bit is set by hardware when a LVD reset is  
generated and cleared by software (writing zero).  
the oscillator frequency) is above V , the MCU  
IT-  
can only be in two modes:  
– under full software control  
– in static safe reset  
Figure 13. Low Voltage Detector vs Reset  
V
DD  
V
hyst  
V
V
IT+  
IT-  
RESET  
27/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
9.2 RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (RSM)  
9.2.1 Introduction  
The 4096 CPU clock cycle delay allows the oscil-  
lator to stabilise and ensures that recovery has  
taken place from the Reset state.  
The reset sequence manager includes three RE-  
SET sources as shown in Figure 15:  
The RESET vector fetch phase duration is 2 clock  
cycles.  
External RESET source pulse  
Internal LVD RESET (Low Voltage Detection)  
Internal WATCHDOG RESET  
Figure 14. RESET Sequence Phases  
These sources act on the RESET pin and it is al-  
ways kept low during the delay phase.  
RESET  
The RESET service routine vector is fixed at ad-  
dresses FFFEh-FFFFh in the ST7 memory map.  
INTERNAL RESET  
FETCH  
DELAY  
4096 CLOCK CYCLES  
VECTOR  
The basic RESET sequence consists of 3 phases  
as shown in Figure 14:  
Delay depending on the RESET source  
4096 CPU clock cycle delay  
RESET vector fetch  
Figure 15. Reset Block Diagram  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
V
DD  
f
CPU  
R
ON  
RESET  
WATCHDOG RESET  
LVD RESET  
28/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
9.2.3 Internal Low Voltage Detection RESET  
RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (Cont’d)  
9.2.2 Asynchronous External RESET pin  
The RESET pin is both an input and an open-drain  
Two different RESET sequences caused by the in-  
ternal LVD circuitry can be distinguished:  
output with integrated R  
weak pull-up resistor.  
ON  
This pull-up has no fixed value but varies in ac-  
cordance with the input voltage. It can be pulled  
low by external circuitry to reset the device. See  
electrical characteristics section for more details.  
Power-On RESET  
Voltage Drop RESET  
The device RESET pin acts as an output that is  
pulled low when V <V  
(rising edge) or  
DD  
IT+  
A RESET signal originating from an external  
V
<V (falling edge) as shown in Figure 16.  
DD  
IT-  
source must have a duration of at least t  
in  
h(RSTL)in  
The LVD filters spikes on V larger than t  
avoid parasitic resets.  
to  
g(VDD)  
order to be recognized. This detection is asynchro-  
nous and therefore the MCU can enter reset state  
even in HALT mode.  
DD  
9.2.4 Internal Watchdog RESET  
The RESET pin is an asynchronous signal which  
plays a major role in EMS performance. In a noisy  
environment, it is recommended to follow the  
guidelines mentioned in the electrical characteris-  
tics section.  
The RESET sequence generated by a internal  
Watchdog counter overflow is shown in Figure 16.  
Starting from the Watchdog counter underflow, the  
device RESET pin acts as an output that is pulled  
low during at least t  
.
w(RSTL)out  
Two RESET sequences can be associated with  
this RESET source: short or long external reset  
pulse (see Figure 16).  
Starting from the external RESET pulse recogni-  
tion, the device RESET pin acts as an output that  
is pulled low during at least t  
.
w(RSTL)out  
Figure 16. RESET Sequences  
V
DD  
V
V
IT+  
IT-  
LVD  
RESET  
SHORT EXT.  
RESET  
LONG EXT.  
RESET  
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
RUN  
RUN  
RUN  
RUN  
RUN  
DELAY  
DELAY  
DELAY  
DELAY  
t
w(RSTL)out  
t
w(RSTL)out  
t
t
h(RSTL)in  
h(RSTL)in  
EXTERNAL  
RESET  
SOURCE  
RESET PIN  
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
WATCHDOG UNDERFLOW  
INTERNAL RESET (4096 TCPU  
FETCH VECTOR  
)
29/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
9.3 MULTI-OSCILLATOR (MO)  
The main clock of the ST7 can be generated by  
four different source types coming from the multi-  
oscillator block:  
Table 3. ST7 Clock Sources  
Hardware Configuration  
an external source  
4 crystal or ceramic resonator oscillators  
an external RC oscillator  
ST7  
OSC1  
OSC2  
an internal high frequency RC oscillator  
Each oscillator is optimized for a given frequency  
range in terms of consumption and is selectable  
through the option byte. The associated hardware  
configuration are shown in Table 3. Refer to the  
electrical characteristics section for more details.  
EXTERNAL  
SOURCE  
External Clock Source  
ST7  
OSC1  
OSC2  
In this external clock mode, a clock signal (square,  
sinus or triangle) with ~50% duty cycle has to drive  
the OSC1 pin while the OSC2 pin is tied to ground.  
Crystal/Ceramic Oscillators  
This family of oscillators has the advantage of pro-  
ducing a very accurate rate on the main clock of  
the ST7. The selection within a list of 4 oscillators  
with different frequency ranges has to be done by  
option byte in order to reduce consumption. In this  
mode of the multi-oscillator, the resonator and the  
load capacitors have to be placed as close as pos-  
sible to the oscillator pins in order to minimize out-  
put distortion and start-up stabilization time. The  
loading capacitance values must be adjusted ac-  
cording to the selected oscillator.  
C
C
L2  
L1  
LOAD  
CAPACITORS  
ST7  
OSC1  
OSC2  
R
C
EX  
EX  
These oscillators are not stopped during the  
RESET phase to avoid losing time in the oscillator  
start-up phase.  
External RC Oscillator  
ST7  
This oscillator allows a low cost solution for the  
main clock of the ST7 using only an external resis-  
tor and an external capacitor. The frequency of the  
external RC oscillator (in the range of some MHz.)  
is fixed by the resistor and the capacitor values.  
Consequently in this MO mode, the accuracy of  
the clock is directly linked to the accuracy of the  
discrete components. The corresponding formula  
OSC1  
OSC2  
is f  
=4/(R  
C
)
OSC  
EX EX  
Internal RC Oscillator  
The internal RC oscillator mode is based on the  
same principle as the external RC oscillator includ-  
ing the resistance and the capacitance of the de-  
vice. This mode is the most cost effective one with  
the drawback of a lower frequency accuracy. Its  
frequency is in the range of several MHz.  
In this mode, the two oscillator pins have to be tied  
to ground.  
30/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
9.4 CLOCK SECURITY SYSTEM (CSS)  
The Clock Security System (CSS) protects the  
ST7 against main clock problems. To allow the in-  
tegration of the security features in the applica-  
tions, it is based on a clock filter control and an In-  
ternal safe oscillator. The CSS can be enabled or  
disabled by option byte.  
Limitation detection  
The automatic safe oscillator selection is notified  
by hardware setting the CSSD bit of the CRSR  
register. An interrupt can be generated if the CS-  
SIE bit has been previously set.  
These two bits are described in the CRSR register  
description.  
9.4.1 Clock Filter Control  
9.4.3 Low Power Modes  
The clock filter is based on a clock frequency limi-  
tation function.  
Mode  
WAIT  
Description  
This filter function is able to detect and filter high  
frequency spikes on the ST7 main clock.  
No effect on CSS. CSS interrupt cause the  
device to exit from Wait mode.  
If the oscillator is not working properly (e.g. work-  
ing at a harmonic frequency of the resonator), the  
current active oscillator clock can be totally fil-  
tered, and then no clock signal is available for the  
ST7 from this oscillator anymore. If the original  
clock source recovers, the filtering is stopped au-  
tomatically and the oscillator supplies the ST7  
clock.  
The CRSR register is frozen. The CSS (in-  
cluding the safe oscillator) is disabled until  
HALT mode is exited. The previous CSS  
configuration resumes when the MCU is  
woken up by an interrupt with “exit from  
HALT mode” capability or from the counter  
reset value when the MCU is woken up by a  
RESET.  
HALT  
9.4.2 Safe Oscillator Control  
9.4.4 Interrupts  
The safe oscillator of the CSS block is a low fre-  
quency back-up clock source (see Figure 17).  
The CSS interrupt event generates an interrupt if  
the corresponding Enable Control Bit (CSSIE) is  
set and the interrupt mask in the CC register is re-  
set (RIM instruction).  
If the clock signal disappears (due to a broken or  
disconnected resonator...) during a safe oscillator  
period, the safe oscillator delivers a low frequency  
clock signal which allows the ST7 to perform some  
rescue operations.  
Enable Exit  
Control from  
Exit  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
from  
1)  
Bit  
Wait Halt  
Automatically, the ST7 clock source switches back  
from the safe oscillator if the original clock source  
recovers.  
CSS event detection  
(safe oscillator acti- CSSD CSSIE  
vated as main clock)  
Yes  
No  
Note 1: This interrupt allows to exit from active-halt  
mode if this mode is available in the MCU.  
Figure 17. Clock Filter Function and Safe Oscillator Function  
f
f
/2  
OSC  
CPU  
f
f
/2  
OSC  
SFOSC  
CPU  
f
31/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
9.5 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Read/Write  
Bit 1 = CSSD Clock security system detection  
This bit indicates that the safe oscillator of the  
clock security system block has been selected by  
hardware due to a disturbance on the main clock  
Reset Value: 000x 000x (xxh)  
7
0
signal (f  
). It is set by hardware and cleared by  
OSC  
reading the CRSR register when the original oscil-  
lator recovers.  
LVD  
RF  
CSS CSS WDG  
0
0
0
0
IE  
D
RF  
0: Safe oscillator is not active  
1: Safe oscillator has been activated  
When the CSS is disabled by option byte, the  
CSSD bit value is forced to 0.  
Bit 7:5 = Reserved, always read as 0.  
Bit 4 = LVDRF LVD reset flag  
This bit indicates that the last RESET was gener-  
ated by the LVD block. It is set by hardware (LVD  
reset) and cleared by software (writing zero). See  
WDGRF flag description for more details. When  
the LVD is disabled by option byte, the LVDRF bit  
value is undefined.  
Bit 0 = WDGRF Watchdog reset flag  
This bit indicates that the last RESET was gener-  
ated by the watchdog peripheral. It is set by hard-  
ware (Watchdog RESET) and cleared by software  
(writing zero) or an LVD RESET (to ensure a sta-  
ble cleared state of the WDGRF flag when the  
CPU starts).  
Combined with the LVDRF flag information, the  
flag description is given by the following table.  
Bit 3 = Reserved, always read as 0.  
RESET Sources  
External RESET pin  
LVDRF WDGRF  
Bit 2 = CSSIE Clock security syst interrupt enable  
.
0
0
1
0
1
X
This bit enables the interrupt when a disturbance  
is detected by the clock security system (CSSD bit  
set). It is set and cleared by software.  
Watchdog  
LVD  
0: Clock security system interrupt disabled  
1: Clock security system interrupt enabled  
Refer to Table 5, “Interrupt mapping,” on page 34  
for more details on the CSS interrupt vector. When  
the CSS is disabled by option byte, the CSSIE bit  
has no effect.  
Application notes  
The LVDRF flag is not cleared when another RE-  
SET type occurs (external or watchdog), the  
LVDRF flag remains set to keep trace of the origi-  
nal failure.  
In this case, a watchdog reset can be detected by  
software while an external reset can not.  
Table 4. Clock, Reset and Supply Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CRSR  
Reset Value  
LVDRF  
x
CFIE  
0
CSSD  
0
WDGRF  
x
002Bh  
0
0
0
0
32/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
10 INTERRUPTS  
The ST7 core may be interrupted by one of two dif-  
ferent methods: maskable hardware interrupts as  
listed in the Interrupt Mapping Table and a non-  
maskable software interrupt (TRAP). The Interrupt  
processing flowchart is shown in Figure 18.  
The maskable interrupts must be enabled by  
clearing the I bit in order to be serviced. However,  
disabled interrupts may be latched and processed  
when they are enabled (see external interrupts  
subsection).  
It will be serviced according to the flowchart on  
Figure 18.  
10.2 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS  
External interrupt vectors can be loaded into the  
PC register if the corresponding external interrupt  
occurred and if the I bit is cleared. These interrupts  
allow the processor to leave the Halt low power  
mode.  
Note: After reset, all interrupts are disabled.  
When an interrupt has to be serviced:  
The external interrupt polarity is selected through  
the miscellaneous register or interrupt register (if  
available).  
– Normal processing is suspended at the end of  
the current instruction execution.  
An external interrupt triggered on edge will be  
latched and the interrupt request automatically  
cleared upon entering the interrupt service routine.  
– The PC, X, A and CC registers are saved onto  
the stack.  
If several input pins, connected to the same inter-  
rupt vector, are configured as interrupts, their sig-  
nals are logically NANDed before entering the  
edge/level detection block.  
– The I bit of the CC register is set to prevent addi-  
tional interrupts.  
– The PC is then loaded with the interrupt vector of  
the interrupt to service and the first instruction of  
the interrupt service routine is fetched (refer to  
the Interrupt Mapping Table for vector address-  
es).  
Caution: The type of sensitivity defined in the Mis-  
cellaneous or Interrupt register (if available) ap-  
plies to the ei source. In case of a NANDed source  
(as described on the I/O ports section), a low level  
on an I/O pin configured as input with interrupt,  
masks the interrupt request even in case of rising-  
edge sensitivity.  
The interrupt service routine should finish with the  
IRET instruction which causes the contents of the  
saved registers to be recovered from the stack.  
Note: As a consequence of the IRET instruction,  
the I bit will be cleared and the main program will  
resume.  
10.3 PERIPHERAL INTERRUPTS  
Different peripheral interrupt flags in the status  
register are able to cause an interrupt when they  
are active if both:  
Priority Management  
By default, a servicing interrupt cannot be inter-  
rupted because the I bit is set by hardware enter-  
ing in interrupt routine.  
– The I bit of the CC register is cleared.  
– The corresponding enable bit is set in the control  
register.  
In the case when several interrupts are simultane-  
ously pending, an hardware priority defines which  
one will be serviced first (see the Interrupt Map-  
ping Table).  
If any of these two conditions is false, the interrupt  
is latched and thus remains pending.  
Clearing an interrupt request is done by:  
Interrupts and Low Power Mode  
– Writing “0” to the corresponding bit in the status  
register or  
All interrupts allow the processor to leave the  
WAIT low power mode. Only external and specifi-  
cally mentioned interrupts allow the processor to  
leave the HALT low power mode (refer to the “Exit  
from HALT“ column in the Interrupt Mapping Ta-  
ble).  
– Access to the status register while the flag is set  
followed by a read or write of an associated reg-  
ister.  
Note: the clearing sequence resets the internal  
latch. A pending interrupt (i.e. waiting for being en-  
abled) will therefore be lost if the clear sequence is  
executed.  
10.1  
NON  
MASKABLE  
SOFTWARE  
INTERRUPT  
This interrupt is entered when the TRAP instruc-  
tion is executed regardless of the state of the I bit.  
33/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
Figure 18. Interrupt Processing Flowchart  
FROM RESET  
N
I BIT SET?  
Y
N
INTERRUPT  
PENDING?  
Y
FETCH NEXT INSTRUCTION  
N
IRET?  
STACK PC, X, A, CC  
SET I BIT  
Y
LOAD PC FROM INTERRUPT VECTOR  
EXECUTE INSTRUCTION  
RESTORE PC, X, A, CC FROM STACK  
THIS CLEARS I BIT BY DEFAULT  
Table 5. Interrupt mapping  
Exit  
Source  
Block  
Register Priority  
Address  
Vector  
N°  
Description  
from  
Label  
Order  
1)  
HALT  
RESET  
TRAP  
Reset  
Highest  
Priority  
yes  
FFFEh-FFFFh  
FFFCh-FFFDh  
FFFAh-FFFBh  
N/A  
Software Interrupt  
Not used  
no  
0
1
MCC/RTC  
CSS  
Main Clock Controller Time Base Interrupt  
or Clock Security System Interrupt  
MCCSR  
CRSR  
yes  
FFF8h-FFF9h  
2
3
ei0  
ei1  
ei2  
ei3  
External Interrupt Port A3..0  
External Interrupt Port F2..0  
External Interrupt Port B3..0  
External Interrupt Port B7..4  
Not used  
FFF6h-FFF7h  
FFF4h-FFF5h  
FFF2h-FFF3h  
FFF0h-FFF1h  
FFEEh-FFEFh  
FFECh-FFEDh  
FFEAh-FFEBh  
FFE8h-FFE9h  
FFE6h-FFE7h  
FFE4h-FFE5h  
FFE2h-FFE3h  
FFE0h-FFE1h  
N/A  
4
5
6
7
SPI  
SPI Peripheral Interrupts  
TIMER A Peripheral Interrupts  
TIMER B Peripheral Interrupts  
SCI Peripheral Interrupts  
SPISR  
TASR  
no  
8
TIMER A  
TIMER B  
SCI  
9
TBSR  
10  
SCISR  
EECSR  
11 Data-EEPROM Data EEPROM Interrupt  
12  
Lowest  
Priority  
Not used  
13  
Note 1. Valid for HALT and ACTIVE-HALT modes except for the MCC/RTC or CSS interrupt source which exits from  
ACTIVE-HALT mode only.  
34/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
11 POWER SAVING MODES  
11.1 INTRODUCTION  
11.2 SLOW MODE  
To give a large measure of flexibility to the applica-  
tion in terms of power consumption, four main  
power saving modes are implemented in the ST7  
(see Figure 19): SLOW, WAIT (SLOW WAIT), AC-  
TIVE HALT and HALT.  
This mode has two targets:  
– To reduce power consumption by decreasing the  
internal clock in the device,  
– To adapt the internal clock frequency (f  
the available supply voltage.  
) to  
CPU  
After a RESET the normal operating mode is se-  
lected by default (RUN mode). This mode drives  
the device (CPU and embedded peripherals) by  
means of a master clock which is based on the  
SLOW mode is controlled by three bits in the  
MISCR1 register: the SMS bit which enables or  
disables Slow mode and two CPx bits which select  
the internal slow frequency (f  
).  
CPU  
main oscillator frequency divided by 2 (f  
).  
CPU  
In this mode, the oscillator frequency can be divid-  
ed by 4, 8, 16 or 32 instead of 2 in normal operat-  
ing mode. The CPU and peripherals are clocked at  
this lower frequency.  
From RUN mode, the different power saving  
modes may be selected by setting the relevant  
register bits or by calling the specific ST7 software  
instruction whose action depends on the oscillator  
status.  
Note: SLOW-WAIT mode is activated when enter-  
ing the WAIT mode while the device is already in  
SLOW mode.  
Figure 19. Power Saving Mode Transitions  
Figure 20. SLOW Mode Clock Transitions  
High  
f
/4  
f
/8  
f
/2  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
RUN  
f
CPU  
SLOW  
WAIT  
f
/2  
OSC  
00  
01  
CP1:0  
SMS  
SLOW WAIT  
ACTIVE HALT  
HALT  
NORMAL RUN MODE  
REQUEST  
NEW SLOW  
FREQUENCY  
REQUEST  
Low  
POWER CONSUMPTION  
35/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
11.3 WAIT MODE  
Figure 21. WAIT Mode Flow-chart  
WAIT mode places the MCU in a low power con-  
sumption mode by stopping the CPU.  
This power saving mode is selected by calling the  
‘WFI’ instruction.  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
I BIT  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
0
WFI INSTRUCTION  
All peripherals remain active. During WAIT mode,  
the I bit of the CC register is cleared, to enable all  
interrupts. All other registers and memory remain  
unchanged. The MCU remains in WAIT mode until  
an interrupt or RESET occurs, whereupon the Pro-  
gram Counter branches to the starting address of  
the interrupt or Reset service routine.  
N
RESET  
Y
N
INTERRUPT  
The MCU will remain in WAIT mode until a Reset  
or an Interrupt occurs, causing it to wake up.  
Y
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
0
Refer to Figure 21.  
CPU  
I BIT  
4096 CPU CLOCK CYCLE  
DELAY  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1)  
I BIT  
X
FETCH RESET VECTOR  
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT  
Note:  
1. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is  
pushed on the stack. The I bit of the CC register is  
set during the interrupt routine and cleared when  
the CC register is popped.  
36/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Figure 22. ACTIVE-HALT Timing Overview  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
11.4 ACTIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES  
ACTIVE-HALT and HALT modes are the two low-  
est power consumption modes of the MCU. They  
are both entered by executing the ‘HALT’ instruc-  
tion. The decision to enter either in ACTIVE-HALT  
or HALT mode is given by the MCC/RTC interrupt  
enable flag (OIE bit in MCCSR register).  
ACTIVE  
HALT  
4096 CPU CYCLE  
RUN  
RUN  
DELAY  
RESET  
OR  
HALT  
INSTRUCTION  
[MCCSR.OIE=1]  
INTERRUPT  
FETCH  
VECTOR  
MCCSR Power Saving Mode entered when HALT  
OIE bit  
instruction is executed  
HALT mode  
ACTIVE-HALT mode  
Figure 23. ACTIVE-HALT Mode Flow-chart  
0
1
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS 1)  
CPU  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
0
HALT INSTRUCTION  
(MCCSR.OIE=1)  
11.4.1 ACTIVE-HALT MODE  
I BIT  
ACTIVE-HALT mode is the lowest power con-  
sumption mode of the MCU with a real time clock  
available. It is entered by executing the ‘HALT’ in-  
struction when the OIE bit of the Main Clock Con-  
troller Status register (MCCSR) is set (see Section  
14.2 "MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL  
TIME CLOCK TIMER (MCC/RTC)" on page 52 for  
more details on the MCCSR register).  
N
RESET  
Y
N
INTERRUPT 2)  
The MCU can exit ACTIVE-HALT mode on recep-  
tion of either an MCC/RTC interrupt, a specific in-  
terrupt (see Table 5, “Interrupt mapping,” on  
page 34) or a RESET. When exiting ACTIVE-  
HALT mode by means of a RESET or an interrupt,  
a 4096 CPU cycle delay occurs. After the start up  
delay, the CPU resumes operation by servicing  
the interrupt or by fetching the reset vector which  
woke it up (see Figure 23).  
When entering ACTIVE-HALT mode, the I bit in  
the CC register is cleared to enable interrupts.  
Therefore, if an interrupt is pending, the MCU  
wakes up immediately.  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS 1)  
CPU  
Y
ON  
OFF  
ON  
I BIT  
X 3)  
4096 CPU CLOCK CYCLE  
DELAY  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
ON  
ON  
X 3)  
I BITS  
In ACTIVE-HALT mode, only the main oscillator  
and its associated counter (MCC/RTC) are run-  
ning to keep a wake-up time base. All other periph-  
erals are not clocked except those which get their  
clock supply from another clock generator (such  
as external or auxiliary oscillator).  
FETCH RESET VECTOR  
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT  
Notes:  
1. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source  
can still be active.  
The safeguard against staying locked in ACTIVE-  
HALT mode is provided by the oscillator interrupt.  
2. Only the MCC/RTC interrupt and some specific  
interrupts can exit the MCU from ACTIVE-HALT  
mode (such as external interrupt). Refer to  
Table 5, “Interrupt mapping,” on page 34 for more  
details.  
Note: As soon as the interrupt capability of one of  
the oscillators is selected (MCCSR.OIE bit set),  
entering ACTIVE-HALT mode while the Watchdog  
is active does not generate a RESET.  
This means that the device cannot spend more  
than a defined delay in this power saving mode.  
3. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is  
pushed on the stack. The I bit of the CC register is  
set during the interrupt routine and cleared when  
the CC register is popped.  
37/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
11.4.2 HALT MODE  
Figure 25. HALT Mode Flow-chart  
The HALT mode is the lowest power consumption  
mode of the MCU. It is entered by executing the  
‘HALT’ instruction when the OIE bit of the Main  
Clock Controller Status register (MCCSR) is  
cleared (see Section 14.2 "MAIN CLOCK CON-  
TROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK TIMER  
(MCC/RTC)" on page 52 for more details on the  
MCCSR register).  
HALT INSTRUCTION  
(MCCSR.OIE=0)  
ENABLE  
WATCHDOG  
0
DISABLE  
WDGHALT 1)  
1
The MCU can exit HALT mode on reception of ei-  
ther a specific interrupt (see Table 5, “Interrupt  
mapping,” on page 34) or a RESET. When exiting  
HALT mode by means of a RESET or an interrupt,  
the oscillator is immediately turned on and the  
4096 CPU cycle delay is used to stabilize the os-  
cillator. After the start up delay, the CPU resumes  
operation by servicing the interrupt or by fetching  
the reset vector which woke it up (see Figure 25).  
When entering HALT mode, the I bit in the CC reg-  
ister is forced to 0 to enable interrupts. Therefore,  
if an interrupt is pending, the MCU wakes immedi-  
ately.  
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
OSCILLATOR  
OFF  
PERIPHERALS 2)  
OFF  
OFF  
0
CPU  
I BIT  
N
RESET  
Y
N
INTERRUPT 3)  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
Y
ON  
OFF  
ON  
In HALT mode, the main oscillator is turned off  
causing all internal processing to be stopped, in-  
cluding the operation of the on-chip peripherals.  
All peripherals are not clocked except the ones  
which get their clock supply from another clock  
generator (such as an external or auxiliary oscilla-  
tor).  
I BIT  
X 4)  
4096 CPU CLOCK CYCLE  
DELAY  
The compatibility of Watchdog operation with  
HALT mode is configured by the “WDGHALT” op-  
tion bit of the option byte. The HALT instruction  
when executed while the Watchdog system is en-  
abled, can generate a Watchdog RESET (see  
Section 18.1 on page 144 for more details).  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
ON  
ON  
X 4)  
I BITS  
Figure 24. HALT Timing Overview  
FETCH RESET VECTOR  
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT  
4096 CPU CYCLE  
RUN  
HALT  
RUN  
Notes:  
DELAY  
1. WDGHALT is an option bit. See option byte sec-  
RESET  
OR  
INTERRUPT  
tion for more details.  
2. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source  
can still be active.  
HALT  
INSTRUCTION  
[MCCSR.OIE=0]  
FETCH  
VECTOR  
3. Only some specific interrupts can exit the MCU  
from HALT mode (such as external interrupt). Re-  
fer to Table 5, “Interrupt mapping,” on page 34 for  
more details.  
4. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is  
pushed on the stack. The I bit of the CC register is  
set during the interrupt routine and cleared when  
the CC register is popped.  
38/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
12 I/O PORTS  
12.1 INTRODUCTION  
programmable using the sensitivity bits in the Mis-  
cellaneous register.  
The I/O ports offer different functional modes:  
– transfer of data through digital inputs and outputs  
Each external interrupt vector is linked to a dedi-  
cated group of I/O port pins (see pinout description  
and interrupt section). If several input pins are se-  
lected simultaneously as interrupt source, these  
are logically NANDed. For this reason if one of the  
interrupt pins is tied low, it masks the other ones.  
and for specific pins:  
– external interrupt generation  
– alternate signal input/output for the on-chip pe-  
ripherals.  
An I/O port contains up to 8 pins. Each pin can be  
programmed independently as digital input (with or  
without interrupt generation) or digital output.  
In case of a floating input with interrupt configura-  
tion, special care must be taken when changing  
the configuration (see Figure 27).  
The external interrupts are hardware interrupts,  
which means that the request latch (not accessible  
directly by the application) is automatically cleared  
when the corresponding interrupt vector is  
fetched. To clear an unwanted pending interrupt  
by software, the sensitivity bits in the Miscellane-  
ous register must be modified.  
12.2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
Each port has 2 main registers:  
– Data Register (DR)  
– Data Direction Register (DDR)  
and one optional register:  
– Option Register (OR)  
12.2.2 Output Modes  
The output configuration is selected by setting the  
corresponding DDR register bit. In this case, writ-  
ing the DR register applies this digital value to the  
I/O pin through the latch. Then reading the DR reg-  
ister returns the previously stored value.  
Each I/O pin may be programmed using the corre-  
sponding register bits in the DDR and OR regis-  
ters: bit X corresponding to pin X of the port. The  
same correspondence is used for the DR register.  
The following description takes into account the  
OR register, (for specific ports which do not pro-  
vide this register refer to the I/O Port Implementa-  
tion section). The generic I/O block diagram is  
shown in Figure 26  
Two different output modes can be selected by  
software through the OR register: Output push-pull  
and open-drain.  
DR register value and output pin status:  
12.2.1 Input Modes  
DR  
0
Push-pull  
Open-drain  
Vss  
V
The input configuration is selected by clearing the  
corresponding DDR register bit.  
SS  
1
V
Floating  
DD  
In this case, reading the DR register returns the  
digital value applied to the external I/O pin.  
12.2.3 Alternate Functions  
When an on-chip peripheral is configured to use a  
pin, the alternate function is automatically select-  
ed. This alternate function takes priority over the  
standard I/O programming.  
Different input modes can be selected by software  
through the OR register.  
Notes:  
1. Writing the DR register modifies the latch value  
but does not affect the pin status.  
When the signal is coming from an on-chip periph-  
eral, the I/O pin is automatically configured in out-  
put mode (push-pull or open drain according to the  
peripheral).  
2. When switching from input to output mode, the  
DR register has to be written first to drive the cor-  
rect level on the pin as soon as the port is config-  
ured as an output.  
When the signal is going to an on-chip peripheral,  
the I/O pin must be configured in input mode. In  
this case, the pin state is also digitally readable by  
addressing the DR register.  
3. Do not use read/modify/write instructions (BSET  
or BRES) to modify the DR register  
External interrupt function  
When an I/O is configured as Input with Interrupt,  
an event on this I/O can generate an external inter-  
rupt request to the CPU.  
Note: Input pull-up configuration can cause unex-  
pected value at the input of the alternate peripheral  
input. When an on-chip peripheral use a pin as in-  
put and output, this pin has to be configured in in-  
put floating mode.  
Each pin can independently generate an interrupt  
request. The interrupt sensitivity is independently  
39/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
Figure 26. I/O Port General Block Diagram  
ALTERNATE  
OUTPUT  
1
0
REGISTER  
ACCESS  
P-BUFFER  
(see table below)  
V
DD  
ALTERNATE  
ENABLE  
PULL-UP  
(see table below)  
DR  
DDR  
OR  
V
DD  
PULL-UP  
CONFIGURATION  
PAD  
If implemented  
OR SEL  
DDR SEL  
DR SEL  
N-BUFFER  
DIODES  
(see table below)  
ANALOG  
INPUT  
CMOS  
SCHMITT  
TRIGGER  
1
0
ALTERNATE  
INPUT  
EXTERNAL  
INTERRUPT  
SOURCE (ei )  
FROM  
OTHER  
BITS  
x
POLARITY  
SELECTION  
Table 6. I/O Port Mode Options  
Configuration Mode  
Diodes  
Pull-Up  
P-Buffer  
to V  
to V  
SS  
DD  
Floating with/without Interrupt  
Pull-up with/without Interrupt  
Push-pull  
Off  
On  
Input  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
NI  
Output  
Open Drain (logic level)  
True Open Drain  
NI  
NI (see note)  
Legend: NI - not implemented  
Off - implemented not activated  
On - implemented and activated  
Note: The diode to V  
is not implemented in the  
DD  
true open drain pads. A local protection between  
the pad and V is implemented to protect the de-  
SS  
vice against positive stress.  
40/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
Table 7. I/O Port Configurations  
Hardware Configuration  
DR REGISTER ACCESS  
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN  
TRUE OPEN DRAIN  
I/O PORTS  
V
DD  
R
PULL-UP  
CONFIGURATION  
W
R
PU  
DR  
REGISTER  
DATA BUS  
PAD  
ALTERNATE INPUT  
FROM  
OTHER  
PINS  
EXTERNAL INTERRUPT  
SOURCE (ei )  
x
INTERRUPT  
POLARITY  
CONFIGURATION  
SELECTION  
ANALOG INPUT  
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN  
TRUE OPEN DRAIN  
I/O PORTS  
DR REGISTER ACCESS  
V
DD  
R
PU  
R/W  
DR  
REGISTER  
DATA BUS  
PAD  
ALTERNATE  
ENABLE  
ALTERNATE  
OUTPUT  
NOT IMPLEMENTED IN  
TRUE OPEN DRAIN  
I/O PORTS  
DR REGISTER ACCESS  
V
DD  
R
PU  
R/W  
DR  
REGISTER  
DATA BUS  
PAD  
ALTERNATE  
ENABLE  
ALTERNATE  
OUTPUT  
Notes:  
1. When the I/O port is in input configuration and the associated alternate function is enabled as an output,  
reading the DR register will read the alternate function output status.  
2. When the I/O port is in output configuration and the associated alternate function is enabled as an input,  
the alternate function reads the pin status given by the DR register content.  
41/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
CAUTION: The alternate function must not be ac-  
tivated as long as the pin is configured as input  
with interrupt, in order to avoid generating spurious  
interrupts.  
Standard Ports  
PA5:4, PC7:0, PD7:0, PE7:4, PE1:0, PF7:6, PF4  
MODE  
DDR  
OR  
Analog alternate function  
floating input  
pull-up input  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
When the pin is used as an ADC input, the I/O  
must be configured as floating input. The analog  
multiplexer (controlled by the ADC registers)  
switches the analog voltage present on the select-  
ed pin to the common analog rail which is connect-  
ed to the ADC input.  
open drain output  
push-pull output  
Interrupt Ports  
PA2:0, PB7:5, PB2:0, PF1:0 (with pull-up)  
It is recommended not to change the voltage level  
or loading on any port pin while conversion is in  
progress. Furthermore it is recommended not to  
have clocking pins located close to a selected an-  
alog pin.  
MODE  
DDR  
OR  
floating input  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
pull-up interrupt input  
open drain output  
push-pull output  
WARNING: The analog input voltage level must  
be within the limits stated in the absolute maxi-  
mum ratings.  
PA3, PB4, PB3, PF2 (without pull-up)  
12.3 I/O PORT IMPLEMENTATION  
MODE  
DDR  
OR  
The hardware implementation on each I/O port de-  
pends on the settings in the DDR and OR registers  
and specific feature of the I/O port such as ADC In-  
put or true open drain.  
floating input  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
floating interrupt input  
open drain output  
push-pull output  
Switching these I/O ports from one state to anoth-  
er should be done in a sequence that prevents un-  
wanted side effects. Recommended safe transi-  
tions are illustrated in Figure 27 Other transitions  
are potentially risky and should be avoided, since  
they are likely to present unwanted side-effects  
such as spurious interrupt generation.  
True Open Drain Ports  
PA7:6  
MODE  
DDR  
floating input  
0
1
open drain (high sink ports)  
Figure 27. Interrupt I/O Port State Transitions  
01  
00  
10  
11  
INPUT  
floating/pull-up  
interrupt  
INPUT  
floating  
(reset state)  
OUTPUT  
open-drain  
OUTPUT  
push-pull  
= DDR, OR  
XX  
The I/O port register configurations are summa-  
rized as follows.  
42/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
12.4 LOW POWER MODES  
12.5 INTERRUPTS  
The external interrupt event generates an interrupt  
if the corresponding configuration is selected with  
DDR and OR registers and the I-bit in the CC reg-  
ister is reset (RIM instruction).  
Mode  
WAIT  
HALT  
Description  
No effect on I/O ports. External interrupts  
cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.  
No effect on I/O ports. External interrupts  
cause the device to exit from HALT mode.  
Enable Exit  
Control from  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Bit  
Wait  
External interrupt on  
selected external  
event  
DDRx  
ORx  
-
Yes  
Yes  
Table 8. Port Configuration  
Input  
Output  
OR = 1  
Port  
Pin name  
OR = 0  
OR = 1  
OR = 0  
High-Sink  
PA7:6  
PA5:4  
PA3  
floating  
true open-drain  
open drain  
Yes  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
floating  
pull-up  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
push-pull  
Port A  
Port B  
floating interrupt  
pull-up interrupt  
floating interrupt  
pull-up interrupt  
pull-up  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
open drain  
PA2:0  
PB4:3  
PB7:5, PB2:0  
PC7:4, PC1:0  
PC3:2  
PD7:0  
PE7:4  
PE1:0  
PF7:6  
No  
Port C  
Port D  
Port E  
pull-up  
Yes  
No  
pull-up  
pull-up  
Yes  
No  
pull-up  
pull-up  
Yes  
PF4  
pull-up  
Port F  
PF2  
floating interrupt  
pull-up interrupt  
No  
PF1:0  
43/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
12.5.1 Register Description  
DATA REGISTER (DR)  
OPTION REGISTER (OR)  
Port x Data Register  
PxDR with x = A, B, C, D, E or F.  
Port x Option Register  
PxOR with x = A, B, C, D, E or F.  
Read/Write  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
7
0
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
O7  
O6  
O5  
O4  
O3  
O2  
O1  
O0  
Bit 7:0 = D[7:0] Data register 8 bits.  
Bit 7:0 = O[7:0] Option register 8 bits.  
The DR register has a specific behaviour accord-  
ing to the selected input/output configuration. Writ-  
ing the DR register is always taken into account  
even if the pin is configured as an input; this allows  
to always have the expected level on the pin when  
toggling to output mode. Reading the DR register  
returns either the DR register latch content (pin  
configured as output) or the digital value applied to  
the I/O pin (pin configured as input).  
For specific I/O pins, this register is not implement-  
ed. In this case the DDR register is enough to se-  
lect the I/O pin configuration.  
The OR register allows to distinguish: in input  
mode if the pull-up with interrupt capability or the  
basic pull-up configuration is selected, in output  
mode if the push-pull or open drain configuration is  
selected.  
Each bit is set and cleared by software.  
Input mode:  
0: floating input  
1: pull-up input with or without interrupt  
DATA DIRECTION REGISTER (DDR)  
Port x Data Direction Register  
PxDDR with x = A, B, C, D, E or F.  
Output mode:  
0: output open drain (with P-Buffer deactivated)  
1: output push-pull  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
DD7  
DD6  
DD5  
DD4  
DD3  
DD2  
DD1  
DD0  
Bit 7:0 = DD[7:0] Data direction register 8 bits.  
The DDR register gives the input/output direction  
configuration of the pins. Each bits is set and  
cleared by software.  
0: Input mode  
1: Output mode  
44/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
Table 9. I/O Port Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reset Value  
of all IO port registers  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0000h  
0001h  
0002h  
0004h  
0005h  
0006h  
0008h  
0009h  
000Ah  
000Ch  
000Dh  
000Eh  
0010h  
0011h  
0012h  
0014h  
0015h  
0016h  
PADR  
PADDR  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
MSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
1)  
PAOR  
PCDR  
PCDDR  
PCOR  
PBDR  
PBDDR  
1)  
PBOR  
PEDR  
PEDDR  
1)  
PEOR  
PDDR  
PDDDR  
1)  
PDOR  
PFDR  
PFDDR  
PFOR  
Notes:  
1) The bits corresponding to unavailable pins are forced to 1 by hardware, this affects the reset status value.  
45/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
13 MISCELLANEOUS REGISTERS  
The miscellaneous registers allow control over  
several different features such as the external in-  
terrupts or the I/O alternate functions.  
Figure 28. Ext. Interrupt Sensitivity  
MISCR1  
IS10 IS11  
13.1 I/O PORT INTERRUPT SENSITIVITY  
PB0  
INTERRUPT  
SOURCE  
ei2  
The external interrupt sensitivity is controlled by  
the ISxx bits of the MISCR1 miscellaneous regis-  
ter. This control allows to have two fully independ-  
ent external interrupt source sensitivities.  
SENSITIVITY  
CONTROL  
PB1  
PB2  
ei3  
PB3  
PB4  
Each external interrupt source can be generated  
on four different events on the pin:  
PB5  
PB6  
Falling edge  
PB7  
MISCR1  
Rising edge  
Falling and rising edge  
Falling edge and low level  
IS20  
IS21  
PA0  
INTERRUPT  
SOURCE  
ei0  
SENSITIVITY  
CONTROL  
PA1  
PA2  
To guarantee correct functionality, the sensitivity  
bits in the MISCR1 register must be modified only  
when the I bit of the CC register is set to 1 (inter-  
rupt masked). See I/O port register and Miscella-  
neous register descriptions for more details on the  
programming.  
ei1  
PA3  
PF0  
PF1  
PF2  
13.2 I/O PORT ALTERNATE FUNCTIONS  
The MISCR registers manage four I/O port miscel-  
laneous alternate functions:  
Main clock signal (f  
) output on PF0  
CPU  
A beep signal output on PF1 (with 3 selectable  
audio frequencies)  
SPI pin configuration:  
– SS pin internal control to use the PC7 I/O port  
function while the SPI is active.  
These functions are described in detail in the Sec-  
tion 13 "MISCELLANEOUS REGISTERS" on  
page 46.  
46/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTERS (Cont’d)  
13.3 REGISTERS DESCRIPTION  
Bit 4:3 = IS2[1:0] ei0 and ei1 sensitivity  
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTER 1 (MISCR1)  
Read/Write  
The interrupt sensitivity, defined using the IS2[1:0]  
bits, is applied to the following external interrupts:-  
ei0 (port A3..0) and ei1 (port F2..0). These 2 bits  
can be written only when the I bit of the CC register  
is set to 1 (interrupt disabled).  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
IS11 IS10 MCO IS21 IS20 CP1 CP0 SMS  
Bit 2:1 = CP[1:0] CPU clock prescaler  
These bits select the CPU clock prescaler which is  
applied in the different slow modes. Their action is  
conditioned by the setting of the SMS bit. These  
two bits are set and cleared by software  
Bit 7:6 = IS1[1:0] ei2 and ei3 sensitivity  
The interrupt sensitivity, defined using the IS1[1:0]  
bits, is applied to the following external interrupts:  
ei2 (port B3..0) and ei3 (port B7..4). These 2 bits  
can be written only when the I bit of the CC register  
is set to 1 (interrupt disabled).  
f
in SLOW mode  
CP1 CP0  
CPU  
f
f
f
f
/ 4  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
/ 8  
/ 16  
/ 32  
External Interrupt Sensitivity  
Falling edge & low level  
Rising edge only  
IS11 IS10  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 0 = SMS Slow mode select  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
Falling edge only  
Rising and falling edge  
0: Normal mode. f  
= fOSC / 2  
is given by CP1, CP0  
CPU  
1: Slow mode. f  
CPU  
See low power consumption mode and MCC  
Bit 5 = MCO Main clock out selection  
chapters for more details.  
This bit enables the MCO alternate function on the  
I/O port. It is set and cleared by software.  
0: MCO alternate function disabled  
(I/O pin free for general-purpose I/O)  
1: MCO alternate function enabled  
(f  
/2 on I/O port)  
OSC  
Note: To reduce power consumption, the MCO  
function is not active in ACTIVE-HALT mode.  
47/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTERS (Cont’d)  
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTER 2 (MISCR2)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
-
-
BC1 BC0  
-
-
SSM SSI  
Bit 7:6 = Reserved Must always be cleared  
Bit 5:4 = BC[1:0] Beep control  
These 2 bits select the PF1 pin beep capability.  
Beep mode with f  
Off  
=16MHz  
BC1 BC0  
OSC  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
~2-KHz  
Output  
Beep signal  
~1-KHz  
~50% duty cycle  
~500-Hz  
The beep output signal is available in ACTIVE-  
HALT mode but has to be disabled to reduce the  
consumption.  
Bit 3:2 = Reserved Must always be cleared  
Bit 1 = SSM SS mode selection  
It is set and cleared by software.  
0: Normal mode - SS uses information coming  
from the SS pin of the SPI.  
1: I/O mode, the SPI uses the information stored  
into bit SSI.  
Bit 0 = SSI SS internal mode  
This bit replaces pin SS of the SPI when bit SSM is  
set to 1. (see SPI description). It is set and cleared  
by software.  
Table 10. Miscellaneous Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MISCR1  
Reset Value  
IS11  
0
IS10  
0
MCO  
0
IS21  
0
IS20  
0
CP1  
0
CP0  
0
SMS  
0
0020h  
0040h  
MISCR2  
Reset Value  
BC1  
0
BC0  
0
SSM  
0
SSI  
0
0
0
0
0
48/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
14 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS  
14.1 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG)  
14.1.1 Introduction  
Hardware Watchdog selectable by option byte  
Watchdog Reset indicated by status flag (in  
The Watchdog timer is used to detect the occur-  
rence of a software fault, usually generated by ex-  
ternal interference or by unforeseen logical condi-  
tions, which causes the application program to  
abandon its normal sequence. The Watchdog cir-  
cuit generates an MCU reset on expiry of a pro-  
grammed time period, unless the program refresh-  
es the counter’s contents before the T6 bit be-  
comes cleared.  
versions with Safe Reset option only)  
14.1.3 Functional Description  
The counter value stored in the CR register (bits  
T[6:0]), is decremented every 12,288 machine cy-  
cles, and the length of the timeout period can be  
programmed by the user in 64 increments.  
14.1.2 Main Features  
If the watchdog is activated (the WDGA bit is set)  
and when the 7-bit timer (bits T[6:0]) rolls over  
from 40h to 3Fh (T6 becomes cleared), it initiates  
a reset cycle pulling low the reset pin for typically  
500ns.  
Programmable timer (64 increments of 12288  
CPU cycles)  
Programmable reset  
Reset (if watchdog activated) after a HALT  
instruction or when the T6 bit reaches zero  
Figure 29. Watchdog Block Diagram  
RESET  
WATCHDOG CONTROL REGISTER (CR)  
T5  
WDGA T6  
T1  
T0  
T4  
T2  
T3  
7-BIT DOWNCOUNTER  
CLOCK DIVIDER  
f
CPU  
÷12288  
49/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)  
The application program must write in the CR reg-  
ister at regular intervals during normal operation to  
prevent an MCU reset. The value to be stored in  
the CR register must be between FFh and C0h  
(see Table 11 .Watchdog Timing (fCPU = 8 MHz)):  
14.1.7 Register Description  
CONTROL REGISTER (CR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0111 1111 (7Fh)  
– The WDGA bit is set (watchdog enabled)  
7
0
– The T6 bit is set to prevent generating an imme-  
diate reset  
WDGA T6  
T5  
T4  
T3  
T2  
T1  
T0  
– The T[5:0] bits contain the number of increments  
which represents the time delay before the  
watchdog produces a reset.  
Bit 7 = WDGA Activation bit.  
This bit is set by software and only cleared by  
hardware after a reset. When WDGA = 1, the  
watchdog can generate a reset.  
Table 11.Watchdog Timing (f  
= 8 MHz)  
CPU  
CR Register  
initial value  
WDG timeout period  
(ms)  
0: Watchdog disabled  
1: Watchdog enabled  
Max  
Min  
FFh  
C0h  
98.304  
1.536  
Note: This bit is not used if the hardware watch-  
dog option is enabled by option byte.  
Bit 6:0 = T[6:0] 7-bit timer (MSB to LSB).  
These bits contain the decremented value. A reset  
is produced when it rolls over from 40h to 3Fh (T6  
becomes cleared).  
Notes: Following a reset, the watchdog is disa-  
bled. Once activated it cannot be disabled, except  
by a reset.  
The T6 bit can be used to generate a software re-  
set (the WDGA bit is set and the T6 bit is cleared).  
STATUS REGISTER (SR)  
Read/Write  
If the watchdog is activated, the HALT instruction  
will generate a Reset.  
Reset Value*: 0000 0000 (00h)  
14.1.4 Hardware Watchdog Option  
7
-
0
If Hardware Watchdog is selected by option byte,  
the watchdog is always active and the WDGA bit in  
the CR is not used.  
-
-
-
-
-
-
WDOGF  
Refer to the device-specific Option Byte descrip-  
tion.  
Bit 0 = WDOGF Watchdog flag.  
This bit is set by a watchdog reset and cleared by  
software or a power on/off reset. This bit is useful  
for distinguishing power/on off or external reset  
and watchdog reset.  
14.1.5 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
0: No Watchdog reset occurred  
1: Watchdog reset occurred  
WAIT  
No effect on Watchdog.  
Immediate reset generation as soon as  
the HALT instruction is executed if the  
Watchdog is activated (WDGA bit is  
set).  
* Only by software and power on/off reset  
HALT  
Note: This register is not used in versions without  
LVD Reset.  
14.1.6 Interrupts  
None.  
50/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)  
Table 12. Watchdog Timer Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
WDGCR  
WDGA  
0
T6  
1
T5  
1
T4  
1
T3  
1
T2  
1
T1  
1
T0  
1
002Ah  
Reset Value  
51/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
14.2 MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK TIMER (MCC/RTC)  
The Main Clock Controller consists of three differ-  
ent functions:  
14.2.2 Clock-out capability  
The clock-out capability is an alternate function of  
an I/O port pin that outputs a f  
external devices. It is controlled by the MCO bit in  
the MISCR1 register.  
CAUTION: When selected, the clock out pin sus-  
pends the clock during ACTIVE-HALT mode.  
a programmable CPU clock prescaler  
/2 clock to drive  
OSC  
a clock-out signal to supply external devices  
a real time clock timer with interrupt capability  
Each function can be used independently and si-  
multaneously.  
14.2.3 Real time clock timer (RTC)  
14.2.1 Programmable CPU clock prescaler  
The counter of the real time clock timer allows an  
interrupt to be generated based on an accurate  
real time clock. Four different time bases depend-  
The programmable CPU clock prescaler supplies  
the clock for the ST7 CPU and its internal periph-  
erals. It manages SLOW power saving mode (See  
Section 11.2 "SLOW MODE" on page 35 for more  
details).  
ing directly on f  
are available. The whole func-  
OSC  
tionality is controlled by four bits of the MCCSR  
register: TB[1:0], OIE and OIF.  
The prescaler selects the f  
cy and is controlled by three bits in the MISCR1  
register: CP[1:0] and SMS.  
main clock frequen-  
When the RTC interrupt is enabled (OIE bit set),  
the ST7 enters ACTIVE-HALT mode when the  
HALT instruction is executed. See Section 11.4  
"ACTIVE-HALT AND HALT MODES" on page 37  
for more details.  
CPU  
CAUTION: The prescaler does not act on the CAN  
peripheral clock source. This peripheral is always  
supplied by the f  
/2 clock source.  
OSC  
Figure 30. Main Clock Controller (MCC/RTC) Block Diagram  
PORT  
ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION  
MCO  
f
/2  
OSC  
MISCR1  
-
-
MCO  
-
-
CP1 CP0 SMS  
f
OSC  
DIV 2, 4, 8, 16  
DIV 2  
CPU CLOCK  
TO CPU AND  
PERIPHERALS  
f
CPU  
RTC  
COUNTER  
MCCSR  
0
0
0
0
TB1 TB0 OIE OIF  
MCC/RTC INTERRUPT  
52/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
MAIN CLOCK CONTROLLER WITH REAL TIME CLOCK TIMER (Cont’d)  
MISCELLANEOUS REGISTER 1 (MISCR1)  
Bit 0 = OIF Oscillator interrupt flag  
See Section 13 on page 46.  
This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software  
reading the CSR register. It indicates when set  
that the main oscillator has measured the selected  
elapsed time (TB1:0).  
MAIN CLOCK CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER  
(MCCSR)  
0: Timeout not reached  
1: Timeout reached  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0001 (01h)  
CAUTION: The BRES and BSET instructions  
must not be used on the MCCSR register to avoid  
unintentionally clearing the OIF bit.  
7
0
0
0
0
0
TB1  
TB0  
OIE  
OIF  
14.2.4 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
Bit 7:4 = Reserved, always read as 0.  
No effect on MCC/RTC peripheral.  
MCC/RTC interrupt cause the device to exit  
from WAIT mode.  
WAIT  
Bit 3:2 = TB[1:0] Time base control  
No effect on MCC/RTC counter (OIE bit is  
ACTIVE- set), the registers are frozen.  
These bits select the programmable divider time  
base. They are set and cleared by software.  
HALT  
MCC/RTC interrupt cause the device to exit  
from ACTIVE-HALT mode.  
Time Base  
Counter  
TB1 TB0  
MCC/RTC counter and registers are frozen.  
MCC/RTC operation resumes when the  
MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit  
from HALT” capability.  
Prescaler  
f
=8MHz  
f
=16MHz  
OSC  
OSC  
HALT  
32000  
64000  
4ms  
8ms  
2ms  
4ms  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
160000  
400000  
20ms  
50ms  
10ms  
25ms  
14.2.5 Interrupts  
The MCC/RTC interrupt event generates an inter-  
rupt if the OIE bit of the MCCSR register is set and  
the interrupt mask in the CC register is not active  
(RIM instruction).  
A modification of the time base is taken into ac-  
count at the end of the current period (previously  
set) to avoid unwanted time shift. This allows to  
use this time base as a real time clock.  
Enable Exit  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Bit 1 = OIE Oscillator interrupt enable  
Time base overflow  
event  
1)  
OIF  
OIE  
Yes  
No  
This bit set and cleared by software.  
0: Oscillator interrupt disabled  
1: Oscillator interrupt enabled  
This interrupt allows to exit from ACTIVE-HALT  
Note:  
1. The MCC/RTC interrupt allows to exit from AC-  
TIVE-HALT mode, not from HALT mode.  
mode.  
When this bit is set, calling the ST7 software HALT  
instruction enters the ACTIVE-HALT power saving  
mode  
.
Table 13. MCC Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MCCSR  
Reset Value  
TB1  
0
TB0  
0
OIE  
0
OIF  
1
0029h  
0
0
0
0
53/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
14.3 16-BIT TIMER  
14.3.1 Introduction  
14.3.3 Functional Description  
14.3.3.1 Counter  
The timer consists of a 16-bit free-running counter  
driven by a programmable prescaler.  
The main block of the Programmable Timer is a  
16-bit free running upcounter and its associated  
16-bit registers. The 16-bit registers are made up  
of two 8-bit registers called high & low.  
It may be used for a variety of purposes, including  
measuring the pulse lengths of up to two input sig-  
nals (input capture) or generating up to two output  
waveforms (output compare and PWM).  
Counter Register (CR):  
Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be mod-  
ulated from a few microseconds to several milli-  
seconds using the timer prescaler and the CPU  
clock prescaler.  
– Counter High Register (CHR) is the most sig-  
nificant byte (MS Byte).  
– Counter Low Register (CLR) is the least sig-  
nificant byte (LS Byte).  
Some ST7 devices have two on-chip 16-bit timers.  
They are completely independent, and do not  
share any resources. They are synchronized after  
a MCU reset as long as the timer clock frequen-  
cies are not modified.  
Alternate Counter Register (ACR)  
– Alternate Counter High Register (ACHR) is the  
most significant byte (MS Byte).  
– Alternate Counter Low Register (ACLR) is the  
least significant byte (LS Byte).  
This description covers one or two 16-bit timers. In  
ST7 devices with two timers, register names are  
prefixed with TA (Timer A) or TB (Timer B).  
These two read-only 16-bit registers contain the  
same value but with the difference that reading the  
ACLR register does not clear the TOF bit (Timer  
overflow flag), located in the Status register (SR).  
(See note at the end of paragraph titled 16-bit read  
sequence).  
14.3.2 Main Features  
Programmableprescaler:fCPU dividedby2, 4or8.  
Overflow status flag and maskable interrupt  
External clock input (must be at least 4 times  
slowerthan theCPUclockspeed)with thechoice  
of active edge  
Output compare functions with:  
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers  
– 2 dedicated programmable signals  
– 2 dedicated status flags  
Writing in the CLR register or ACLR register resets  
the free running counter to the FFFCh value.  
Both counters have a reset value of FFFCh (this is  
the only value which is reloaded in the 16-bit tim-  
er). The reset value of both counters is also  
FFFCh in One Pulse mode and PWM mode.  
The timer clock depends on the clock control bits  
of the CR2 register, as illustrated in Table 14 Clock  
Control Bits. The value in the counter register re-  
peats every 131072, 262144 or 524288 CPU clock  
cycles depending on the CC[1:0] bits.  
– 1 dedicated maskable interrupt  
Input capture functions with:  
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers  
– 2 dedicated active edge selection signals  
– 2 dedicated status flags  
The timer frequency can be f  
or an external frequency.  
/2, f  
/4, f  
/8  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
– 1 dedicated maskable interrupt  
Pulse Width Modulation mode (PWM)  
One Pulse mode  
5 alternate functionson I/O ports (ICAP1, ICAP2,  
OCMP1, OCMP2, EXTCLK)*  
The Block Diagram is shown in Figure 31.  
*Note: Some timer pins may not be available (not  
bonded) in some ST7 devices. Refer to the device  
pin out description.  
When reading an input signal on a non-bonded  
pin, the value will always be ‘1’.  
54/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 31. Timer Block Diagram  
ST7 INTERNAL BUS  
f
CPU  
MCU-PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
8 low  
8-bit  
8 high  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
buffer  
w
w
w
w
EXEDG  
h
o
h
o
h
o
h
lo  
16  
INPUT  
CAPTURE  
REGISTER  
INPUT  
CAPTURE  
REGISTER  
OUTPUT  
COMPARE  
REGISTER  
OUTPUT  
COMPARE  
REGISTER  
1/2  
1/4  
1/8  
COUNTER  
REGISTER  
1
1
2
2
ALTERNATE  
COUNTER  
REGISTER  
EXTCLK  
pin  
16  
16  
16  
CC[1:0]  
TIMER INTERNAL BUS  
16 16  
OVERFLOW  
DETECT  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT1  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
CIRCUIT  
ICAP1  
pin  
CIRCUIT  
6
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT2  
ICAP2  
pin  
OCMP1  
pin  
LATCH1  
LATCH2  
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2  
0
0
0
OCMP2  
pin  
(Status Register) SR  
EXEDG  
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1  
OC1E  
OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2  
OC2E  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
(See note)  
Note: If IC, OC and TO interrupt requests have separate vectors  
then the last OR is not present (See device Interrupt Vector Table)  
TIMER INTERRUPT  
55/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
16-bit Read Sequence: (from either the Counter  
Register or the Alternate Counter Register).  
Clearing the overflow interrupt request is done in  
two steps:  
1. Reading the SR register while the TOF bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the CLR register.  
Beginning of the sequence  
Read  
LS Byte  
is buffered  
Note: The TOF bit is not cleared by accessing the  
ACLR register. The advantage of accessing the  
ACLR register rather than the CLR register is that  
it allows simultaneous use of the overflow function  
and reading the free running counter at random  
times (for example, to measure elapsed time) with-  
out the risk of clearing the TOF bit erroneously.  
MS Byte  
At t0  
Other  
instructions  
Returns the buffered  
LS Byte value at t0  
Read  
LS Byte  
At t0 +t  
The timer is not affected by WAIT mode.  
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until the  
mode is exited. Counting then resumes from the  
previous count (MCU awakened by an interrupt) or  
from the reset count (MCU awakened by a Reset).  
Sequence completed  
The user must read the MS Byte first, then the LS  
Byte value is buffered automatically.  
This buffered value remains unchanged until the  
16-bit read sequence is completed, even if the  
user reads the MS Byte several times.  
14.3.3.2 External Clock  
The external clock (where available) is selected if  
CC0=1 and CC1=1 in the CR2 register.  
After a complete reading sequence, if only the  
CLR register or ACLR register are read, they re-  
turn the LS Byte of the count value at the time of  
the read.  
The status of the EXEDG bit in the CR2 register  
determines the type of level transition on the exter-  
nal clock pin EXTCLK that will trigger the free run-  
ning counter.  
Whatever the timer mode used (input capture, out-  
put compare, One Pulse mode or PWM mode) an  
overflow occurs when the counter rolls over from  
FFFFh to 0000h then:  
The counter is synchronised with the falling edge  
of the internal CPU clock.  
A minimum of four falling edges of the CPU clock  
must occur between two consecutive active edges  
of the external clock; thus the external clock fre-  
quency must be less than a quarter of the CPU  
clock frequency.  
– The TOF bit of the SR register is set.  
– A timer interrupt is generated if:  
– TOIE bit of the CR1 register is set and  
– I bit of the CC register is cleared.  
If one of these conditions is false, the interrupt re-  
mains pending to be issued as soon as they are  
both true.  
56/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 32. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 2  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000 0001 0002 0003  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Figure 33. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 4  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
FFFC  
FFFD  
0000  
0001  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Figure 34. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 8  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
0000  
FFFC  
FFFD  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Note: The MCU is in reset state when the internal reset signal is high. When it is low, the MCU is running.  
57/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
14.3.3.3 Input Capture  
When an input capture occurs:  
– The ICFi bit is set.  
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because  
there are 2 input capture functions in the 16-bit  
timer.  
– The ICiR register contains the value of the free  
running counter on the active transition on the  
ICAPi pin (see Figure 36).  
The two input capture 16-bit registers (IC1R and  
IC2R) are used to latch the value of the free run-  
ning counter after a transition is detected by the  
ICAPi pin (see figure 5).  
– A timer interrupt is generated if the ICIE bit is set  
and the I bit is cleared in the CC register. Other-  
wise, the interrupt remains pending until both  
conditions become true.  
MS Byte  
ICiHR  
LS Byte  
ICiLR  
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:  
ICiR  
The ICiR register is a read-only register.  
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.  
The active transition is software programmable  
through the IEDGi bit of Control Registers (CRi).  
Timing resolution is one count of the free running  
Notes:  
counter: (f  
/CC[1:0]).  
CPU  
1. After reading the ICiHR register, the transfer of  
input capture data is inhibited and ICFi will  
never be set until the ICiLR register is also  
read.  
Procedure:  
To use the input capture function, select the fol-  
lowing in the CR2 register:  
2. The ICiR register contains the free running  
counter value which corresponds to the most  
recent input capture.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits).  
3. The 2 input capture functions can be used  
together even if the timer also uses the 2 output  
compare functions.  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP2 pin with the IEDG2 bit (the ICAP2 pin  
must be configured as a floating input or input  
with pull-up without interrupt if this configuration  
is available).  
4. In One Pulse mode and PWM mode only the  
input capture 2 function can be used.  
And select the following in the CR1 register:  
5. The alternate inputs (ICAP1 & ICAP2) are  
always directly connected to the timer. So any  
transitions on these pins activate the input cap-  
ture function.  
– Set the ICIE bit to generate an interrupt after an  
input capture coming from either the ICAP1 pin  
or the ICAP2 pin  
Moreover if one of the ICAPi pin is configured  
as an input and the second one as an output,  
an interrupt can be generated if the user tog-  
gles the output pin and if the ICIE bit is set.  
This can be avoided if the input capture func-  
tion i is disabled by reading the ICiHR (see note  
1).  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1 pin  
must be configured as a floating input or input  
with pull-up without interrupt if this configuration  
is available).  
6. The TOF bit can be used with an interrupt in  
order to measure events that exceed the timer  
range (FFFFh).  
58/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 35. Input Capture Block Diagram  
ICAP1  
pin  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT2  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT1  
ICIE  
IEDG1  
ICAP2  
pin  
(Status Register) SR  
ICF1  
ICF2  
0
0
0
IC2R Register  
IC1R Register  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
16-BIT  
16-BIT FREE RUNNING  
COUNTER  
IEDG2  
CC0  
CC1  
Figure 36. Input Capture Timing Diagram  
TIMER CLOCK  
FF01  
FF02  
FF03  
COUNTER REGISTER  
ICAPi PIN  
ICAPi FLAG  
FF03  
ICAPi REGISTER  
Note: Active edge is rising edge.  
59/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
14.3.3.4 Output Compare  
– The OCMPi pin takes OLVLi bit value (OCMPi  
pin latch is forced low during reset).  
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because  
there are 2 output compare functions in the 16-bit  
timer.  
– A timer interrupt is generated if the OCIE bit is  
set in the CR1 register and the I bit is cleared in  
the CC register (CC).  
This function can be used to control an output  
waveform or indicate when a period of time has  
elapsed.  
The OCiR register value required for a specific tim-  
ing application can be calculated using the follow-  
ing formula:  
When a match is found between the Output Com-  
pare register and the free running counter, the out-  
put compare function:  
– Assigns pins with a programmable value if the  
OCiE bit is set  
t f  
* CPU  
PRESC  
OCiR =  
– Sets a flag in the status register  
– Generates an interrupt if enabled  
Where:  
t  
= Output compare period (in seconds)  
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
Two 16-bit registers Output Compare Register 1  
(OC1R) and Output Compare Register 2 (OC2R)  
contain the value to be compared to the counter  
register each timer clock cycle.  
f
CPU  
PRESC  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 de-  
pending on CC[1:0] bits, see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits)  
MS Byte  
OCiHR  
LS Byte  
OCiLR  
OCiR  
If the timer clock is an external clock, the formula  
is:  
These registers are readable and writable and are  
not affected by the timer hardware. A reset event  
changes the OCiR value to 8000h.  
OCiR = t f  
* EXT  
Timing resolution is one count of the free running  
Where:  
counter: (f  
).  
CC[1:0]  
CPU/  
t  
= Output compare period (in seconds)  
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
f
EXT  
Procedure:  
To use the output compare function, select the fol-  
lowing in the CR2 register:  
Clearing the output compare interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the OCFi bit) is done by:  
– Set the OCiE bit if an output is needed then the  
OCMPi pin is dedicated to the output compare i  
signal.  
1. Reading the SR register while the OCFi bit is  
set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the OCiLR register.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits).  
The following procedure is recommended to pre-  
vent the OCFi bit from being set between the time  
it is read and the write to the OCiR register:  
And select the following in the CR1 register:  
– Select the OLVLi bit to applied to the OCMPi pins  
after the match occurs.  
– Write to the OCiHR register (further compares  
are inhibited).  
– Set the OCIE bit to generate an interrupt if it is  
needed.  
– Read the SR register (first step of the clearance  
of the OCFi bit, which may be already set).  
When a match is found between OCRi register  
and CR register:  
– Write to the OCiLR register (enables the output  
compare function and clears the OCFi bit).  
– OCFi bit is set.  
60/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Forced Compare Output capability  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Notes:  
1. After a processor write cycle to the OCiHR reg-  
ister, the output compare function is inhibited  
until the OCiLR register is also written.  
When the FOLVi bit is set by software, the OLVLi  
bit is copied to the OCMPi pin. The OLVi bit has to  
be toggled in order to toggle the OCMPi pin when  
it is enabled (OCiE bit=1). The OCFi bit is then not  
set by hardware, and thus no interrupt request is  
generated.  
2. If the OCiE bit is not set, the OCMPi pin is a  
general I/O port and the OLVLi bit will not  
appear when a match is found but an interrupt  
could be generated if the OCIE bit is set.  
3. When the timer clock is f  
/2, OCFi and  
FOLVLi bits have no effect in either One-Pulse  
mode or PWM mode.  
CPU  
OCMPi are set while the counter value equals  
the OCiR register value (see Figure 38 on page  
62). This behaviour is the same in OPM or  
PWM mode.  
When the timer clock is f  
/4, f  
/8 or in  
CPU  
CPU  
external clock mode, OCFi and OCMPi are set  
while the counter value equals the OCiR regis-  
ter value plus 1 (see Figure 39 on page 62).  
4. The output compare functions can be used both  
for generating external events on the OCMPi  
pins even if the input capture mode is also  
used.  
5. The value in the 16-bit OCiR register and the  
OLVi bit should be changed after each suc-  
cessful comparison in order to control an output  
waveform or establish a new elapsed timeout.  
Figure 37. Output Compare Block Diagram  
16 BIT FREE RUNNING  
OC1E  
CC1 CC0  
OC2E  
COUNTER  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
16-bit  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
CIRCUIT  
Latch  
1
OCIE  
FOLV2 FOLV1OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OCMP1  
Pin  
16-bit  
16-bit  
Latch  
2
OCMP2  
Pin  
OC1R Register  
OCF1  
OCF2  
0
0
0
OC2R Register  
(Status Register) SR  
61/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 38. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f  
=f  
/2  
TIMER  
CPU  
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK  
TIMER CLOCK  
COUNTER REGISTER  
2ECF 2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
2ED4  
2ED3  
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)  
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)  
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)  
Figure 39. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f  
=f  
/4  
TIMER  
CPU  
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK  
TIMER CLOCK  
2ECF 2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
2ED4  
2ED3  
COUNTER REGISTER  
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)  
COMPARE REGISTER i LATCH  
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)  
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)  
62/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
14.3.3.5 One Pulse Mode  
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:  
One Pulse mode enables the generation of a  
pulse when an external event occurs. This mode is  
selected via the OPM bit in the CR2 register.  
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.  
The One Pulse mode uses the Input Capture1  
function and the Output Compare1 function.  
The OC1R register value required for a specific  
timing application can be calculated using the fol-  
lowing formula:  
Procedure:  
t * f  
To use One Pulse mode:  
CPU  
- 5  
OCiR Value =  
1. Load the OC1R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the length of the pulse (see the for-  
mula in the opposite column).  
PRESC  
Where:  
t
= Pulse period (in seconds)  
2. Select the following in the CR1 register:  
f
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
CPU  
PRESC  
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after the pulse.  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-  
ing on the CC[1:0] bits, see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits)  
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin during the pulse.  
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1 pin  
must be configured as floating input).  
OCiR = t f  
-5  
* EXT  
Where:  
t
3. Select the following in the CR2 register:  
= Pulse period (in seconds)  
– Set the OC1E bit, the OCMP1 pin is then ded-  
icated to the Output Compare 1 function.  
f
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
EXT  
– Set the OPM bit.  
When the value of the counter is equal to the value  
of the contents of the OC1R register, the OLVL1  
bit is output on the OCMP1 pin (see Figure 40).  
– Select the timer clock CC[1:0] (see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits).  
One Pulse mode cycle  
When  
Notes:  
1. The OCF1 bit cannot be set by hardware in  
One Pulse mode but the OCF2 bit can generate  
an Output Compare interrupt.  
OCMP1 = OLVL2  
event occurs  
on ICAP1  
Counter is reset  
2. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and  
One Pulse mode (OPM) bits are both set, the  
PWM mode is the only active one.  
to FFFCh  
ICF1 bit is set  
3. If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be  
seen on the OCMP1 pin.  
When  
Counter  
OCMP1 = OLVL1  
= OC1R  
4. The ICAP1 pin can not be used to perform input  
capture. The ICAP2 pin can be used to perform  
input capture (ICF2 can be set and IC2R can be  
loaded) but the user must take care that the  
counter is reset each time a valid edge occurs  
on the ICAP1 pin and ICF1 can also generates  
interrupt if ICIE is set.  
Then, on a valid event on the ICAP1 pin, the coun-  
ter is initialized to FFFCh and the OLVL2 bit is  
loaded on the OCMP1 pin, the ICF1 bit is set and  
the value FFFDh is loaded in the IC1R register.  
Because the ICF1 bit is set when an active edge  
occurs, an interrupt can be generated if the ICIE  
bit is set.  
5. When One Pulse mode is used OC1R is dedi-  
cated to this mode. Nevertheless OC2R and  
OCF2 can be used to indicate that a period of  
time has elapsed but cannot generate an output  
waveform because the OLVL2 level is dedi-  
cated to One Pulse mode.  
63/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 40. One Pulse Mode Timing Example  
FFFC FFFD FFFE  
COUNTER  
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
FFFC FFFD  
ICAP1  
OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OLVL2  
OCMP1  
compare1  
Note: IEDG1=1, OC1R=2ED0h, OLVL1=0, OLVL2=1  
Figure 41. Pulse Width Modulation Mode Timing Example  
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
34E2 FFFC  
FFFC FFFD FFFE  
34E2  
COUNTER  
OCMP1  
OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OLVL2  
compare2  
compare1  
compare2  
Note: OC1R=2ED0h, OC2R=34E2, OLVL1=0, OLVL2= 1  
64/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
14.3.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode  
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode enables the  
generation of a signal with a frequency and pulse  
length determined by the value of the OC1R and  
OC2R registers.  
The OCiR register value required for a specific tim-  
ing application can be calculated using the follow-  
ing formula:  
t * f  
CPU  
PRESC  
- 5  
OCiR Value =  
The Pulse Width Modulation mode uses the com-  
plete Output Compare 1 function plus the OC2R  
register, and so these functions cannot be used  
when the PWM mode is activated.  
Where:  
t
= Signal or pulse period (in seconds)  
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
f
Procedure  
CPU  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-  
ing on CC[1:0] bits, see Table 14 Clock  
Control Bits)  
To use Pulse Width Modulation mode:  
PRESC  
1. Load the OC2R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the period of the signal using the  
formula in the opposite column.  
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:  
2. Load the OC1R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the period of the pulse if OLVL1=0  
and OLVL2=1, using the formula in the oppo-  
site column.  
OCiR = t f  
-5  
* EXT  
Where:  
t
= Signal or pulse period (in seconds)  
3. Select the following in the CR1 register:  
f
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
EXT  
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful  
comparison with OC1R register.  
The Output Compare 2 event causes the counter  
to be initialized to FFFCh (See Figure 41)  
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful  
comparison with OC2R register.  
Notes:  
1. After a write instruction to the OCiHR register,  
the output compare function is inhibited until the  
OCiLR register is also written.  
4. Select the following in the CR2 register:  
– Set OC1E bit: the OCMP1 pin is then dedicat-  
ed to the output compare 1 function.  
2. The OCF1 and OCF2 bits cannot be set by  
hardware in PWM mode, therefore the Output  
Compare interrupt is inhibited.  
– Set the PWM bit.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 14  
Clock Control Bits).  
3. The ICF1 bit is set by hardware when the coun-  
ter reaches the OC2R value and can produce a  
timer interrupt if the ICIE bit is set and the I bit is  
cleared.  
If OLVL1=1 and OLVL2=0, the length of the posi-  
tive pulse is the difference between the OC2R and  
OC1R registers.  
4. In PWM mode the ICAP1 pin can not be used  
to perform input capture because it is discon-  
nected from the timer. The ICAP2 pin can be  
used to perform input capture (ICF2 can be set  
and IC2R can be loaded) but the user must  
take care that the counter is reset after each  
period and ICF1 can also generate an interrupt  
if ICIE is set.  
If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be seen  
on the OCMP1 pin.  
Pulse Width Modulation cycle  
When  
Counter  
= OC1R  
OCMP1 = OLVL1  
OCMP1 = OLVL2  
5. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and  
One Pulse mode (OPM) bits are both set, the  
PWM mode is the only active one.  
When  
Counter  
= OC2R  
Counter is reset  
to FFFCh  
ICF1 bit is set  
65/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
14.3.4 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on 16-bit Timer.  
WAIT  
Timer interrupts cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.  
16-bit Timer registers are frozen.  
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until Halt mode is exited. Counting resumes from the previous  
count when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability or from the counter  
reset value when the MCU is woken up by a RESET.  
HALT  
If an input capture event occurs on the ICAPi pin, the input capture detection circuitry is armed. Consequent-  
ly, when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability, the ICFi bit is set, and  
the counter value present when exiting from HALT mode is captured into the ICiR register.  
14.3.5 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Input Capture 1 event/Counter reset in PWM mode  
Input Capture 2 event  
ICF1  
ICF2  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
ICIE  
Output Compare 1 event (not available in PWM mode)  
Output Compare 2 event (not available in PWM mode)  
Timer Overflow event  
OCF1  
OCF2  
TOF  
OCIE  
TOIE  
Note: The 16-bit Timer interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chap-  
ter). These events generate an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt  
mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).  
14.3.6 Summary of Timer modes  
AVAILABLE RESOURCES  
MODES  
Input Capture 1  
Input Capture 2  
Yes  
Output Compare 1 Output Compare 2  
Input Capture (1 and/or 2)  
Output Compare (1 and/or 2)  
One Pulse mode  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1)  
3)  
2)  
Not Recommended  
Not Recommended  
Partially  
No  
PWM Mode  
No  
No  
1)  
2)  
3)  
See note 4 in Section 14.3.3.5 "One Pulse Mode" on page 63  
See note 5 in Section 14.3.3.5 "One Pulse Mode" on page 63  
See note 4 in Section 14.3.3.6 "Pulse Width Modulation Mode" on page 65  
66/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
14.3.7 Register Description  
Bit 4 = FOLV2 Forced Output Compare 2.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: No effect on the OCMP2 pin.  
1: Forces the OLVL2 bit to be copied to the  
OCMP2 pin, if the OC2E bit is set and even if  
there is no successful comparison.  
Each Timer is associated with three control and  
status registers, and with six pairs of data registers  
(16-bit values) relating to the two input captures,  
the two output compares, the counter and the al-  
ternate counter.  
Bit 3 = FOLV1 Forced Output Compare 1.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: No effect on the OCMP1 pin.  
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CR1)  
Read/Write  
1: Forces OLVL1 to be copied to the OCMP1 pin, if  
the OC1E bit is set and even if there is no suc-  
cessful comparison.  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1  
Bit 2 = OLVL2 Output Level 2.  
This bit is copied to the OCMP2 pin whenever a  
successful comparison occurs with the OC2R reg-  
ister and OCxE is set in the CR2 register. This val-  
ue is copied to the OCMP1 pin in One Pulse mode  
and Pulse Width Modulation mode.  
Bit 7 = ICIE Input Capture Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the  
ICF1 or ICF2 bit of the SR register is set.  
Bit 1 = IEDG1 Input Edge 1.  
Bit 6 = OCIE Output Compare Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the ICAP1 pin will trigger the capture.  
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.  
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.  
OCF1 or OCF2 bit of the SR register is set.  
Bit 5 = TOIE Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is enabled whenever the TOF  
Bit 0 = OLVL1 Output Level 1.  
The OLVL1 bit is copied to the OCMP1 pin when-  
ever a successful comparison occurs with the  
OC1R register and the OC1E bit is set in the CR2  
register.  
bit of the SR register is set.  
67/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (CR2)  
Read/Write  
Bit 4 = PWM Pulse Width Modulation.  
0: PWM mode is not active.  
1: PWM mode is active, the OCMP1 pin outputs a  
programmable cyclic signal; the length of the  
pulse depends on the value of OC1R register;  
the period depends on the value of OC2R regis-  
ter.  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
OC1E OC2E OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2 EXEDG  
Bits 3:2 = CC[1:0] Clock Control.  
Bit 7 = OC1E Output Compare 1 Pin Enable.  
This bit is used only to output the signal from the  
timer on the OCMP1 pin (OLV1 in Output Com-  
pare mode, both OLV1 and OLV2 in PWM and  
one-pulse mode). Whatever the value of the OC1E  
bit, the internal Output Compare 1 function of the  
timer remains active.  
0: OCMP1 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin  
free for general-purpose I/O).  
1: OCMP1 pin alternate function enabled.  
The timer clock mode depends on these bits:  
Table 14. Clock Control Bits  
Timer Clock  
fCPU / 4  
CC1  
CC0  
0
0
1
0
1
0
fCPU / 2  
fCPU / 8  
External Clock (where  
available)  
1
1
Bit 6 = OC2E Output Compare 2 Pin Enable.  
This bit is used only to output the signal from the  
timer on the OCMP2 pin (OLV2 in Output Com-  
pare mode). Whatever the value of the OC2E bit,  
the internal Output Compare 2 function of the timer  
remains active.  
0: OCMP2 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin  
free for general-purpose I/O).  
1: OCMP2 pin alternate function enabled.  
Note: If the external clock pin is not available, pro-  
gramming the external clock configuration stops  
the counter.  
Bit 1 = IEDG2 Input Edge 2.  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the ICAP2 pin will trigger the capture.  
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.  
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.  
Bit 5 = OPM One Pulse mode.  
0: One Pulse mode is not active.  
Bit 0 = EXEDG External Clock Edge.  
1: One Pulse mode is active, the ICAP1 pin can be  
used to trigger one pulse on the OCMP1 pin; the  
active transition is given by the IEDG1 bit. The  
length of the generated pulse depends on the  
contents of the OC1R register.  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the external clock pin (EXTCLK) will trigger the  
counter register.  
0: A falling edge triggers the counter register.  
1: A rising edge triggers the counter register.  
68/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
STATUS REGISTER (SR)  
Read Only  
INPUT CAPTURE 1 HIGH REGISTER (IC1HR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
The three least significant bits are not used.  
7
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
high part of the counter value (transferred by the  
input capture 1 event).  
0
0
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2  
0
0
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
Bit 7 = ICF1 Input Capture Flag 1.  
0: No input capture (reset value).  
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP1 pin  
or the counter has reached the OC2R value in  
PWM mode. To clear this bit, first read the SR  
register, then read or write the low byte of the  
IC1R (IC1LR) register.  
INPUT CAPTURE 1 LOW REGISTER (IC1LR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
low part of the counter value (transferred by the in-  
put capture 1 event).  
Bit 6 = OCF1 Output Compare Flag 1.  
0: No match (reset value).  
1: The content of the free running counter matches  
the content of the OC1R register. To clear this  
bit, first read the SR register, then read or write  
the low byte of the OC1R (OC1LR) register.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
Bit 5 = TOF Timer Overflow Flag.  
0: No timer overflow (reset value).  
1:The free running counter has rolled over from  
FFFFh to 0000h. To clear this bit, first read the  
SR register, then read or write the low byte of  
the CR (CLR) register.  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC1HR)  
1
HIGH REGISTER  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.  
Note: Reading or writing the ACLR register does  
not clear TOF.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
Bit 4 = ICF2 Input Capture Flag 2.  
0: No input capture (reset value).  
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP2  
pin. To clear this bit, first read the SR register,  
then read or write the low byte of the IC2R  
(IC2LR) register.  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC1LR)  
1
LOW REGISTER  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Bit 3 = OCF2 Output Compare Flag 2.  
0: No match (reset value).  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the value to be compared to the CLR register.  
1: The content of the free running counter matches  
the content of the OC2R register. To clear this  
bit, first read the SR register, then read or write  
the low byte of the OC2R (OC2LR) register.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
Bit 2-0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.  
69/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC2HR)  
2
HIGH REGISTER  
ALTERNATE COUNTER HIGH REGISTER  
(ACHR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the counter value.  
7
0
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
MSB  
LSB  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC2LR)  
2
LOW REGISTER  
ALTERNATE COUNTER LOW REGISTER  
(ACLR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the value to be compared to the CLR register.  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the counter value. A write to this register resets the  
counter. An access to this register after an access  
to SR register does not clear the TOF bit in SR  
register.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
COUNTER HIGH REGISTER (CHR)  
MSB  
LSB  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)  
INPUT CAPTURE 2 HIGH REGISTER (IC2HR)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the counter value.  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
7
0
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
high part of the counter value (transferred by the  
Input Capture 2 event).  
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
COUNTER LOW REGISTER (CLR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the counter value. A write to this register resets the  
counter. An access to this register after accessing  
the SR register clears the TOF bit.  
INPUT CAPTURE 2 LOW REGISTER (IC2LR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
low part of the counter value (transferred by the In-  
put Capture 2 event).  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
70/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Table 15. 16-Bit Timer Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Timer A: 32 CR1  
ICIE  
0
OCIE  
0
TOIE  
0
FOLV2  
0
FOLV1  
0
OLVL2  
0
IEDG1  
0
OLVL1  
0
Timer B: 42 Reset Value  
Timer A: 31 CR2  
OC1E  
0
OC2E  
0
OPM  
0
PWM  
0
CC1  
0
CC0  
0
IEDG2  
0
EXEDG  
0
Timer B: 41 Reset Value  
Timer A: 33 SR  
ICF1  
0
OCF1  
0
TOF  
0
ICF2  
0
OCF2  
0
-
-
-
Timer B: 43 Reset Value  
0
0
0
Timer A: 34 ICHR1  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Timer B: 44 Reset Value  
Timer A: 35 ICLR1  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
Timer B: 45 Reset Value  
Timer A: 36 OCHR1  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
Timer B: 46 Reset Value  
Timer A: 37 OCLR1  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
Timer B: 47 Reset Value  
Timer A: 3E OCHR2  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
Timer B: 4E Reset Value  
Timer A: 3F OCLR2  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
Timer B: 4F Reset Value  
Timer A: 38 CHR  
MSB  
1
LSB  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
Timer B: 48 Reset Value  
Timer A: 39 CLR  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
Timer B: 49 Reset Value  
Timer A: 3A ACHR  
MSB  
1
LSB  
1
Timer B: 4A Reset Value  
Timer A: 3B ACLR  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
0
-
Timer B: 4B Reset Value  
Timer A: 3C ICHR2  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
Timer B: 4C Reset Value  
Timer A: 3D ICLR2  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Timer B: 4D Reset Value  
71/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
14.4 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)  
14.4.1 Introduction  
14.4.3 General description  
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows full-  
duplex, synchronous, serial communication with  
external devices. An SPI system may consist of a  
master and one or more slaves or a system in  
which devices may be either masters or slaves.  
The SPI is connected to external devices through  
4 alternate pins:  
– MISO: Master In Slave Out pin  
– MOSI: Master Out Slave In pin  
– SCK: Serial Clock pin  
The SPI is normally used for communication be-  
tween the microcontroller and external peripherals  
or another microcontroller.  
– SS: Slave select pin  
Refer to the Pin Description chapter for the device-  
specific pin-out.  
A basic example of interconnections between a  
single master and a single slave is illustrated on  
Figure 42.  
14.4.2 Main Features  
The MOSI pins are connected together as are  
MISO pins. In this way data is transferred serially  
between master and slave (most significant bit  
first).  
Full duplex, three-wire synchronous transfers  
Master or slave operation  
Four master mode frequencies  
When the master device transmits data to a slave  
device via MOSI pin, the slave device responds by  
sending data to the master device via the MISO  
pin. This implies full duplex transmission with both  
data out and data in synchronized with the same  
clock signal (which is provided by the master de-  
vice via the SCK pin).  
Maximum slave mode frequency = f  
/4.  
CPU  
Four programmable master bit rates  
Programmable clock polarity and phase  
End of transfer interrupt flag  
Write collision flag protection  
Master mode fault protection capability.  
Thus, the byte transmitted is replaced by the byte  
received and eliminates the need for separate  
transmit-empty and receiver-full bits. A status flag  
is used to indicate that the I/O operation is com-  
plete.  
Four possible data/clock timing relationships may  
be chosen (see Figure 45) but master and slave  
must be programmed with the same timing mode.  
Figure 42. Serial Peripheral Interface Master/Slave  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MSBit  
LSBit  
MSBit  
LSBit  
MISO  
MOSI  
MISO  
MOSI  
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER  
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER  
SPI  
CLOCK  
GENERATOR  
SCK  
SS  
SCK  
SS  
+5V  
72/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Figure 43. Serial Peripheral Interface Block Diagram  
Internal Bus  
Read  
DR  
Read Buffer  
IT  
request  
MOSI  
SR  
MISO  
8-Bit Shift Register  
Write  
MODF  
WCOL  
SPIF  
-
-
-
-
-
SPI  
STATE  
CONTROL  
SCK  
SS  
CR  
SPIE SPE SPR2 MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0  
MASTER  
CONTROL  
SERIAL  
CLOCK  
GENERATOR  
73/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.4.4 Functional Description  
In this configuration the MOSI pin is a data output  
and to the MISO pin is a data input.  
Figure 42 shows the serial peripheral interface  
(SPI) block diagram.  
This interface contains 3 dedicated registers:  
– A Control Register (CR)  
Transmit sequence  
The transmit sequence begins when a byte is writ-  
ten the DR register.  
– A Status Register (SR)  
The data byte is parallel loaded into the 8-bit shift  
register (from the internal bus) during a write cycle  
and then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin most  
significant bit first.  
– A Data Register (DR)  
Refer to the CR, SR and DR registers in Section  
14.4.7for the bit definitions.  
14.4.4.1 Master Configuration  
When data transfer is complete:  
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware  
In a master configuration, the serial clock is gener-  
ated on the SCK pin.  
– An interrupt is generated if the SPIE bit is set  
and the I bit in the CCR register is cleared.  
Procedure  
– Select the SPR0 & SPR1 bits to define the se-  
rial clock baud rate (see CR register).  
During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is set, a  
copy of the data byte received in the shift register  
is moved to a buffer. When the DR register is read,  
the SPI peripheral returns this buffered value.  
– Select the CPOL and CPHA bits to define one  
of the four relationships between the data  
transfer and the serial clock (see Figure 45).  
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following  
software sequence:  
– The SS pin must be connected to a high level  
signal during the complete byte transmit se-  
quence.  
1. An access to the SR register while the SPIF bit  
is set  
– The MSTR and SPE bits must be set (they re-  
main set only if the SS pin is connected to a  
high level signal).  
2. A read to the DR register.  
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the DR  
register are inhibited until the SR register is read.  
74/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.4.4.2 Slave Configuration  
When data transfer is complete:  
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware  
In slave configuration, the serial clock is received  
on the SCK pin from the master device.  
– An interrupt is generated if SPIE bit is set and  
I bit in CCR register is cleared.  
The value of the SPR0 & SPR1 bits is not used for  
the data transfer.  
During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is set, a  
copy of the data byte received in the shift register  
is moved to a buffer. When the DR register is read,  
the SPI peripheral returns this buffered value.  
Procedure  
– For correct data transfer, the slave device  
must be in the same timing mode as the mas-  
ter device (CPOL and CPHA bits). See Figure  
45.  
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following  
software sequence:  
1. An access to the SR register while the SPIF bit  
is set.  
– The SS pin must be connected to a low level  
signal during the complete byte transmit se-  
quence.  
2.A read to the DR register.  
– Clear the MSTR bit and set the SPE bit to as-  
sign the pins to alternate function.  
Notes: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the  
DR register are inhibited until the SR register is  
read.  
In this configuration the MOSI pin is a data input  
and the MISO pin is a data output.  
The SPIF bit can be cleared during a second  
transmission; however, it must be cleared before  
the second SPIF bit in order to prevent an overrun  
condition (see Section 14.4.4.6).  
Transmit Sequence  
The data byte is parallel loaded into the 8-bit shift  
register (from the internal bus) during a write cycle  
and then shifted out serially to the MISO pin most  
significant bit first.  
Depending on the CPHA bit, the SS pin has to be  
set to write to the DR register between each data  
byte transfer to avoid a write collision (see Section  
14.4.4.4).  
The transmit sequence begins when the slave de-  
vice receives the clock signal and the most signifi-  
cant bit of the data on its MOSI pin.  
75/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.4.4.3 Data Transfer Format  
The master device applies data to its MOSI pin-  
clock edge before the capture clock edge.  
During an SPI transfer, data is simultaneously  
transmitted (shifted out serially) and received  
(shifted in serially). The serial clock is used to syn-  
chronize the data transfer during a sequence of  
eight clock pulses.  
CPHA bit is set  
The second edge on the SCK pin (falling edge if  
the CPOL bit is reset, rising edge if the CPOL bit is  
set) is the MSBit capture strobe. Data is latched on  
the occurrence of the second clock transition.  
The SS pin allows individual selection of a slave  
device; the other slave devices that are not select-  
ed do not interfere with the SPI transfer.  
No write collision should occur even if the SS pin  
stays low during a transfer of several bytes (see  
Figure 44).  
Clock Phase and Clock Polarity  
Four possible timing relationships may be chosen  
by software, using the CPOL and CPHA bits.  
CPHA bit is reset  
The CPOL (clock polarity) bit controls the steady  
state value of the clock when no data is being  
transferred. This bit affects both master and slave  
modes.  
The first edge on the SCK pin (falling edge if CPOL  
bit is set, rising edge if CPOL bit is reset) is the  
MSBit capture strobe. Data is latched on the oc-  
currence of the first clock transition.  
The combination between the CPOL and CPHA  
(clock phase) bits selects the data capture clock  
edge.  
The SS pin must be toggled high and low between  
each byte transmitted (see Figure 44).  
To protect the transmission from a write collision a  
low value on the SS pin of a slave device freezes  
the data in its DR register and does not allow it to  
be altered. Therefore the SS pin must be high to  
write a new data byte in the DR without producing  
a write collision.  
Figure 45, shows an SPI transfer with the four  
combinations of the CPHA and CPOL bits. The di-  
agram may be interpreted as a master or slave  
timing diagram where the SCK pin, the MISO pin,  
the MOSI pin are directly connected between the  
master and the slave device.  
The SS pin is the slave device select input and can  
be driven by the master device.  
Figure 44. CPHA / SS Timing Diagram  
Byte 3  
Byte 2  
MOSI/MISO  
Master SS  
Byte 1  
Slave SS  
(CPHA=0)  
Slave SS  
(CPHA=1)  
VR02131A  
76/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Figure 45. Data Clock Timing Diagram  
CPHA =1  
SCLK (with  
CPOL = 1)  
SCLK (with  
CPOL = 0)  
Bit 4  
Bit 4  
Bit3  
Bit3  
Bit 2  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
LSBit  
LSBit  
MSBit  
MSBit  
Bit 6  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 5  
MISO  
(from master)  
MOSI  
(from slave)  
SS  
(to slave)  
CAPTURE STROBE  
CPHA =0  
CPOL = 1  
CPOL = 0  
Bit 4  
Bit 4  
Bit3  
Bit 2  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
LSBit  
LSBit  
MSBit  
Bit 6  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 5  
MISO  
(from master)  
MSBit  
Bit3  
MOSI  
(from slave)  
SS  
(to slave)  
CAPTURE STROBE  
Note: This figure should not be used as a replacement for parametric information.  
Refer to the Electrical Characteristics chapter.  
VR02131B  
77/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.4.4.4 Write Collision Error  
When the CPHA bit is reset:  
A write collision occurs when the software tries to  
write to the DR register while a data transfer is tak-  
ing place with an external device. When this hap-  
pens, the transfer continues uninterrupted; and  
the software write will be unsuccessful.  
Data is latched on the occurrence of the first clock  
transition. The slave device does not have any  
way of knowing when that transition will occur;  
therefore, the slave device collision occurs when  
software attempts to write the DR register after its  
SS pin has been pulled low.  
Write collisions can occur both in master and slave  
mode.  
For this reason, the SS pin must be high, between  
each data byte transfer, to allow the CPU to write  
in the DR register without generating a write colli-  
sion.  
Note: a "read collision" will never occur since the  
received data byte is placed in a buffer in which  
access is always synchronous with the MCU oper-  
ation.  
In Slave mode  
In Master mode  
When the CPHA bit is set:  
Collision in the master device is defined as a write  
of the DR register while the internal serial clock  
(SCK) is in the process of transfer.  
The slave device will receive a clock (SCK) edge  
prior to the latch of the first data transfer. This first  
clock edge will freeze the data in the slave device  
DR register and output the MSBit on to the exter-  
nal MISO pin of the slave device.  
The SS pin signal must be always high on the  
master device.  
The SS pin low state enables the slave device but  
the output of the MSBit onto the MISO pin does  
not take place until the first data transfer clock  
edge.  
WCOL bit  
The WCOL bit in the SR register is set if a write  
collision occurs.  
No SPI interrupt is generated when the WCOL bit  
is set (the WCOL bit is a status flag only).  
Clearing the WCOL bit is done through a software  
sequence (see Figure 46).  
Figure 46. Clearing the WCOL bit (Write Collision Flag) Software Sequence  
Clearing sequence after SPIF = 1 (end of a data byte transfer)  
Read SR  
Read SR  
1st Step  
2nd Step  
OR  
THEN  
THEN  
SPIF =0  
WCOL=0  
SPIF =0  
WCOL=0 if no transfer has started  
WCOL=1 if a transfer has started  
before the 2nd step  
Read DR  
Write DR  
Clearing sequence before SPIF = 1 (during a data byte transfer)  
Read SR  
1st Step  
THEN  
Note: Writing to the DR register  
2nd Step  
Read DR  
instead of reading in it does not  
reset the WCOL bit  
WCOL=0  
78/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.4.4.5 Master Mode Fault  
may be restored to their original state during or af-  
ter this clearing sequence.  
Master mode fault occurs when the master device  
has its SS pin pulled low, then the MODF bit is set.  
Hardware does not allow the user to set the SPE  
and MSTR bits while the MODF bit is set except in  
the MODF bit clearing sequence.  
Master mode fault affects the SPI peripheral in the  
following ways:  
In a slave device the MODF bit can not be set, but  
in a multi master configuration the device can be in  
slave mode with this MODF bit set.  
– The MODF bit is set and an SPI interrupt is  
generated if the SPIE bit is set.  
– The SPE bit is reset. This blocks all output  
from the device and disables the SPI periph-  
eral.  
The MODF bit indicates that there might have  
been a multi-master conflict for system control and  
allows a proper exit from system operation to a re-  
set or default system state using an interrupt rou-  
tine.  
– The MSTR bit is reset, thus forcing the device  
into slave mode.  
Clearing the MODF bit is done through a software  
sequence:  
14.4.4.6 Overrun Condition  
An overrun condition occurs when the master de-  
vice has sent several data bytes and the slave de-  
vice has not cleared the SPIF bit issuing from the  
previous data byte transmitted.  
1. A read or write access to the SR register while  
the MODF bit is set.  
2. A write to the CR register.  
In this case, the receiver buffer contains the byte  
sent after the SPIF bit was last cleared. A read to  
the DR register returns this byte. All other bytes  
are lost.  
Notes: To avoid any multiple slave conflicts in the  
case of a system comprising several MCUs, the  
SS pin must be pulled high during the clearing se-  
quence of the MODF bit. The SPE and MSTR bits  
This condition is not detected by the SPI peripher-  
al.  
79/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.4.4.7 Single Master and Multimaster Configurations  
There are two types of SPI systems:  
– Single Master System  
For more security, the slave device may respond  
to the master with the received data byte. Then the  
master will receive the previous byte back from the  
slave device if all MISO and MOSI pins are con-  
nected and the slave has not written its DR regis-  
ter.  
– Multimaster System  
Single Master System  
Other transmission security methods can use  
ports for handshake lines or data bytes with com-  
mand fields.  
A typical single master system may be configured,  
using an MCU as the master and four MCUs as  
slaves (see Figure 47).  
Multi-master System  
The master device selects the individual slave de-  
vices by using four pins of a parallel port to control  
the four SS pins of the slave devices.  
A multi-master system may also be configured by  
the user. Transfer of master control could be im-  
plemented using a handshake method through the  
I/O ports or by an exchange of code messages  
through the serial peripheral interface system.  
The SS pins are pulled high during reset since the  
master device ports will be forced to be inputs at  
that time, thus disabling the slave devices.  
The multi-master system is principally handled by  
the MSTR bit in the CR register and the MODF bit  
in the SR register.  
Note: To prevent a bus conflict on the MISO line  
the master allows only one active slave device  
during a transmission.  
Figure 47. Single Master Configuration  
SS  
SS  
SS  
SS  
SCK  
Slave  
MCU  
SCK  
Slave  
MCU  
SCK  
Slave  
SCK  
Slave  
MCU  
MCU  
MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI  
MOSI MISO  
SCK  
Master  
MCU  
5V  
SS  
80/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.4.5 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on SPI.  
WAIT  
SPI interrupt events cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.  
SPI registers are frozen.  
HALT  
In HALT mode, the SPI is inactive. SPI operation resumes when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with  
“exit from HALT mode” capability.  
14.4.6 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Yes  
Yes  
SPI End of Transfer Event  
Master Mode Fault Event  
SPIF  
No  
No  
SPIE  
MODF  
Note: The SPI interrupt events are connected to  
the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter).  
They generate an interrupt if the corresponding  
Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt mask in  
the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).  
81/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.4.7 Register Description  
CONTROL REGISTER (CR)  
Read/Write  
Bit 3 = CPOL Clock polarity.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. This bit de-  
termines the steady state of the serial Clock. The  
CPOL bit affects both the master and slave  
modes.  
0: The steady state is a low value at the SCK pin.  
1: The steady state is a high value at the SCK pin.  
Reset Value: 0000xxxx (0xh)  
7
0
SPIE SPE SPR2 MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0  
Bit 7 = SPIE Serial peripheral interrupt enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SPI interrupt is generated whenever SPIF=1  
or MODF=1 in the SR register  
Bit 2 = CPHA Clock phase.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: The first clock transition is the first data capture  
edge.  
1: The second clock transition is the first capture  
edge.  
Bit 6 = SPE Serial peripheral output enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also  
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0  
(see Section 14.4.4.5 "Master Mode Fault" on  
page 79).  
0: I/O port connected to pins  
1: SPI alternate functions connected to pins  
Bit 1:0 = SPR[1:0] Serial peripheral rate.  
These bits are set and cleared by software.Used  
with the SPR2 bit, they select one of six baud rates  
to be used as the serial clock when the device is a  
master.  
The SPE bit is cleared by reset, so the SPI periph-  
eral is not initially connected to the external pins.  
These 2 bits have no effect in slave mode.  
Table 16. Serial Peripheral Baud Rate  
Bit 5 = SPR2 Divider Enable.  
Serial Clock  
SPR2 SPR1 SPR0  
this bit is set and cleared by software and it is  
cleared by reset. It is used with the SPR[1:0] bits to  
set the baud rate. Refer to Table 16.  
0: Divider by 2 enabled  
f
f
/4  
/8  
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
CPU  
CPU  
f
f
f
/16  
/32  
/64  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
1: Divider by 2 disabled  
f
/128  
CPU  
Bit 4 = MSTR Master.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also  
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0  
(see Section 14.4.4.5 "Master Mode Fault" on  
page 79).  
0: Slave mode is selected  
1: Master mode is selected, the function of the  
SCK pin changes from an input to an output and  
the functions of the MISO and MOSI pins are re-  
versed.  
82/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
STATUS REGISTER (SR)  
Read Only  
DATA I/O REGISTER (DR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value: Undefined  
7
0
-
7
0
SPIF  
WCOL  
-
MODF  
-
-
-
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Bit 7 = SPIF Serial Peripheral data transfer flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when a transfer has  
been completed. An interrupt is generated if  
SPIE=1 in the CR register. It is cleared by a soft-  
ware sequence (an access to the SR register fol-  
lowed by a read or write to the DR register).  
0: Data transfer is in progress or has been ap-  
proved by a clearing sequence.  
The DR register is used to transmit and receive  
data on the serial bus. In the master device only a  
write to this register will initiate transmission/re-  
ception of another byte.  
Notes: During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is  
set, a copy of the received data byte in the shift  
register is moved to a buffer. When the user reads  
the serial peripheral data I/O register, the buffer is  
actually being read.  
1: Data transfer between the device and an exter-  
nal device has been completed.  
Warning:  
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the DR  
register are inhibited.  
A write to the DR register places data directly into  
the shift register for transmission.  
A read to the the DR register returns the value lo-  
cated in the buffer and not the contents of the shift  
register (See Figure 43 ).  
Bit 6 = WCOL Write Collision status.  
This bit is set by hardware when a write to the DR  
register is done during a transmit sequence. It is  
cleared by a software sequence (see Figure 46).  
0: No write collision occurred  
1: A write collision has been detected  
Bit 5 = Unused.  
Bit 4 = MODF Mode Fault flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when the SS pin is  
pulled low in master mode (see Section 14.4.4.5  
"Master Mode Fault" on page 79). An SPI interrupt  
can be generated if SPIE=1 in the CR register.  
This bit is cleared by a software sequence (An ac-  
cess to the SR register while MODF=1 followed by  
a write to the CR register).  
0: No master mode fault detected  
1: A fault in master mode has been detected  
Bits 3-0 = Unused.  
83/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Table 17. SPI Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SPIDR  
Reset Value  
MSB  
x
LSB  
x
0021h  
0022h  
0023h  
x
x
x
x
x
x
SPICR  
Reset Value  
SPIE  
0
SPE  
0
SPR2  
0
MSTR  
0
CPOL  
x
CPHA  
x
SPR1  
x
SPR0  
x
SPISR  
Reset Value  
SPIF  
0
WCOL  
0
MODF  
0
0
0
0
0
0
84/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
14.5.3 General Description  
14.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)  
14.5.1 Introduction  
The Serial Communications Interface (SCI) offers  
a flexible means of full-duplex data exchange with  
external equipment requiring an industry standard  
NRZ asynchronous  
The interface is externally connected to another  
device by two pins (see Figure 2.):  
– TDO: Transmit Data Output. When the transmit-  
ter is disabled, the output pin returns to its I/O  
port configuration. When the transmitter is ena-  
bled and nothing is to be transmitted, the TDO  
pin is at high level.  
serial data format. The SCI offers a very wide  
range of baud rates using two baud rate generator  
systems.  
14.5.2 Main Features  
– RDI: Receive Data Input is the serial data input.  
Oversampling techniques are used for data re-  
covery by discriminating between valid incoming  
data and noise.  
Full duplex, asynchronous communications  
NRZ standard format (Mark/Space)  
Dual baud rate generator systems  
Through this pins, serial data is transmitted and re-  
ceived as frames comprising:  
Independently programmable transmit and  
receive baud rates up to 250K baud using  
conventional baud rate generator and up to  
500K baud using the extended baud rate  
generator.  
– An Idle Line prior to transmission or reception  
– A start bit  
– A data word (8 or 9 bits) least significant bit first  
– A Stop bit indicating that the frame is complete.  
Thisinterfaceusestwotypesofbaudrategenerator:  
Programmable data word length (8 or 9 bits)  
Receive buffer full, Transmit buffer empty and  
End of Transmission flags  
– A conventional type for commonly-used baud  
rates,  
Two receiver wake-up modes:  
– Address bit (MSB)  
– An extended type with a prescaler offering a very  
wide range of baud rates even with non-standard  
oscillator frequencies.  
– Idle line  
Mutingfunctionformultiprocessorconfigurations  
LIN compatible (if MCU clock frequency  
tolerance 2%)  
14.5.4 LIN Protocol support  
For LIN applications where resynchronization is  
not required (application clock tolerance less than  
or equal to 2%) the LIN protocol can be efficiently  
implemented with this standard SCI.  
Separate enable bits for Transmitter and  
Receiver  
Three error detection flags:  
– Overrun error  
– Noise error  
– Frame error  
Five interrupt sources with flags:  
– Transmit data register empty  
– Transmission complete  
– Receive data register full  
– Idle line received  
– Overrun error detected  
85/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Figure 48. SCI Block Diagram  
Write  
Read  
(DATA REGISTER) DR  
Received Data Register (RDR)  
Received Shift Register  
Transmit Data Register (TDR)  
TDO  
Transmit Shift Register  
RDI  
CR1  
-
R8  
-
T8  
M
WAKE  
-
-
WAKE  
UP  
TRANSMIT  
RECEIVER  
CLOCK  
RECEIVER  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
SR  
CR2  
TIE TCIE RIE ILIE TE RE RWU SBK  
TDRE  
RDRF  
IDLE OR NF FE  
TC  
-
SCI  
INTERRUPT  
CONTROL  
TRANSMITTER  
CLOCK  
TRANSMITTER RATE  
CONTROL  
f
CPU  
/2  
/PR  
/16  
BRR  
SCP1SCP0 SCT2  
SCT1SCT0SCR2 SCR1SCR0  
RECEIVER RATE  
CONTROL  
CONVENTIONAL BAUD RATE GENERATOR  
86/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
14.5.5.1 Serial Data Format  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.5.5 Functional Description  
The block diagram of the Serial Control Interface,  
is shown in Figure 1.. It contains 6 dedicated reg-  
isters:  
Word length may be selected as being either 8 or 9  
bits by programming the M bit in the CR1 register  
(see Figure 1.).  
– Two control registers (CR1 & CR2)  
– A status register (SR)  
The TDO pin is in low state during the start bit.  
The TDO pin is in high state during the stop bit.  
– A baud rate register (BRR)  
An Idle character is interpreted as an entire frame  
of “1”s followed by the start bit of the next frame  
which contains data.  
– An extended prescaler receiver register (ERPR)  
Anextendedprescalertransmitterregister(ETPR)  
A Break character is interpreted on receiving “0”s  
for some multiple of the frame period. At the end of  
the last break frame the transmitter inserts an ex-  
tra “1” bit to acknowledge the start bit.  
Refer to the register descriptions in Section 0.1.8  
for the definitions of each bit.  
Transmission and reception are driven by their  
own baud rate generator.  
Figure 49. Word length programming  
9-bit Word length (M bit is set)  
Possible  
Next Data Frame  
Parity  
Data Frame  
Start  
Bit  
Next  
Start  
Bit  
Stop  
Bit  
Bit2  
Bit6  
Bit1  
Bit3  
Bit5  
Bit8  
Bit0  
Bit4  
Bit7  
Bit  
Start  
Bit  
Idle Frame  
Start  
Bit  
Extra  
’1’  
Break Frame  
8-bit Word length (M bit is reset)  
Possible  
Parity  
Next Data Frame  
Data Frame  
Start  
Bit  
Next  
Start  
Bit  
Stop  
Bit  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit3  
Bit5  
Bit6  
Bit0  
Bit4  
Bit7  
Bit  
Start  
Bit  
Idle Frame  
Start  
Bit  
Extra  
’1’  
Break Frame  
87/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.5.5.2 Transmitter  
When a frame transmission is complete (after the  
stop bit or after the break frame) the TC bit is set  
and an interrupt is generated if the TCIE is set and  
the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.  
The transmitter can send data words of either 8 or  
9 bits depending on the M bit status. When the M  
bit is set, word length is 9 bits and the 9th bit (the  
MSB) has to be stored in the T8 bit in the CR1 reg-  
ister.  
Clearing the TC bit is performed by the following  
software sequence:  
1. An access to the SR register  
2. A write to the DR register  
Character Transmission  
During an SCI transmission, data shifts out least  
significant bit first on the TDO pin. In this mode,  
the DR register consists of a buffer (TDR) between  
the internal bus and the transmit shift register (see  
Figure 1.).  
Note: The TDRE and TC bits are cleared by the  
same software sequence.  
Break Characters  
Setting the SBK bit loads the shift register with a  
break character. The break frame length depends  
on the M bit (see Figure 2.).  
Procedure  
– Select the M bit to define the word length.  
As long as the SBK bit is set, the SCI send break  
frames to the TDO pin. After clearing this bit by  
software the SCI insert a logic 1 bit at the end of  
the last break frame to guarantee the recognition  
of the start bit of the next frame.  
– Select the desired baud rate using the BRR and  
the ETPR registers.  
– Set the TE bit to assign the TDO pin to the alter-  
nate function and to send a idle frame as first  
transmission.  
Idle Characters  
– Access the SR register and write the data to  
send in the DR register (this sequence clears the  
TDRE bit). Repeat this sequence for each data to  
be transmitted.  
Setting the TE bit drives the SCI to send an idle  
frame before the first data frame.  
Clearing and then setting the TE bit during a trans-  
mission sends an idle frame after the current word.  
Clearing the TDRE bit is always performed by the  
following software sequence:  
1. An access to the SR register  
Note: Resetting and setting the TE bit causes the  
data in the TDR register to be lost. Therefore the  
best time to toggle the TE bit is when the TDRE bit  
is set i.e. before writing the next byte in the DR.  
2. A write to the DR register  
The TDRE bit is set by hardware and it indicates:  
– The TDR register is empty.  
– The data transfer is beginning.  
– The next data can be written in the DR register  
without overwriting the previous data.  
This flag generates an interrupt if the TIE bit is set  
and the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.  
When a transmission is taking place, a write in-  
struction to the DR register stores the data in the  
TDR register and which is copied in the shift regis-  
ter at the end of the current transmission.  
When no transmission is taking place, a write in-  
struction to the DR register places the data directly  
in the shift register, the data transmission starts,  
and the TDRE bit is immediately set.  
88/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.5.5.3 Receiver  
Overrun Error  
The SCI can receive data words of either 8 or 9  
bits. When the M bit is set, word length is 9 bits  
and the MSB is stored in the R8 bit in the CR1 reg-  
ister.  
An overrun error occurs when a character is re-  
ceived when RDRF has not been reset. Data can  
not be transferred from the shift register to the  
TDR register as long as the RDRF bit is not  
cleared.  
Character reception  
When a overrun error occurs:  
– The OR bit is set.  
During a SCI reception, data shifts in least signifi-  
cant bit first through the RDI pin. In this mode, DR  
register consists in a buffer (RDR) between the in-  
ternal bus and the received shift register (see Fig-  
ure 1.).  
– The RDR content will not be lost.  
– The shift register will be overwritten.  
– An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and  
the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.  
Procedure  
– Select the M bit to define the word length.  
The OR bit is reset by an access to the SR register  
followed by a DR register read operation.  
– Select the desired baud rate using the BRR and  
the ERPR registers.  
Noise Error  
– Set the RE bit, this enables the receiver which  
begins searching for a start bit.  
Oversampling techniques are used for data recov-  
ery by discriminating between valid incoming data  
and noise.  
When a character is received:  
– The RDRF bit is set. It indicates that the content  
of the shift register is transferred to the RDR.  
When noise is detected in a frame:  
– The NF is set at the rising edge of the RDRF bit.  
– An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and  
the I bit is cleared in the CCR register.  
– Data is transferred from the Shift register to the  
DR register.  
– The error flags can be set if a frame error, noise  
or an overrun error has been detected during re-  
ception.  
– No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises  
at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself  
generates an interrupt.  
Clearing the RDRF bit is performed by the following  
software sequence done by:  
The NF bit is reset by a SR register read operation  
followed by a DR register read operation.  
1. An access to the SR register  
2. A read to the DR register.  
Framing Error  
A framing error is detected when:  
The RDRF bit must be cleared before the end of the  
reception of the next character to avoid an overrun  
error.  
– The stop bit is not recognized on reception at the  
expected time, following either a de-synchroni-  
zation or excessive noise.  
Break Character  
– A break is received.  
When a break character is received, the SCI han-  
dles it as a framing error.  
When the framing error is detected:  
– the FE bit is set by hardware  
Idle Character  
– Data is transferred from the Shift register to the  
DR register.  
When a idle frame is detected, there is the same  
procedure as a data received character plus an in-  
terrupt if the ILIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared in  
the CCR register.  
– No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises  
at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself  
generates an interrupt.  
The FE bit is reset by a SR register read operation  
followed by a DR register read operation.  
89/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Figure 50. SCI Baud Rate and Extended Prescaler Block Diagram  
EXTENDED PRESCALER TRANSMITTER RATE CONTROL  
ETPR  
EXTENDED TRANSMITTER PRESCALER REGISTER  
ERPR  
EXTENDED RECEIVER PRESCALER REGISTER  
EXTENDED PRESCALER RECEIVER RATE CONTROL  
EXTENDED PRESCALER  
f
TRANSMITTER  
CLOCK  
CPU  
TRANSMITTER RATE  
CONTROL  
/PR  
/2  
/16  
BRR  
SCP1  
SCT2  
SCT1SCT0SCR2 SCR1SCR0  
SCP0  
RECEIVER  
CLOCK  
RECEIVER RATE  
CONTROL  
CONVENTIONAL BAUD RATE GENERATOR  
90/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.5.5.4 Conventional Baud Rate Generation  
than zero. The baud rates are calculated as fol-  
lows:  
The baud rate for the receiver and transmitter (Rx  
and Tx) are set independently and calculated as  
follows:  
f
f
CPU  
CPU  
Rx =  
Tx =  
f
f
16 ERPR  
16 ETPR  
CPU  
CPU  
*
*
Rx =  
Tx =  
(32 PR) RR  
(32 PR) TR  
*
*
*
*
with:  
with:  
ETPR = 1,..,255 (see ETPR register)  
PR = 1, 3, 4 or 13 (see SCP0 & SCP1 bits)  
TR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128  
ERPR = 1,.. 255 (see ERPR register)  
14.5.5.6 Receiver Muting and Wake-up Feature  
(see SCT0, SCT1 & SCT2 bits)  
RR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128  
In multiprocessor configurations it is often desira-  
ble that only the intended message recipient  
should actively receive the full message contents,  
thus reducing redundant SCI service overhead for  
all non addressed receivers.  
(see SCR0,SCR1 & SCR2 bits)  
All this bits are in the BRR register.  
Example: If f  
PR=13 and TR=RR=1, the transmit and receive  
baud rates are 19200 baud.  
is 8 MHz (normal mode) and if  
CPU  
The non addressed devices may be placed in  
sleep mode by means of the muting function.  
Setting the RWU bit by software puts the SCI in  
sleep mode:  
Caution: The baud rate register (SCIBRR) MUST  
NOT be written to (changed or refreshed) while the  
transmitter or the receiver is enabled.  
All the reception status bits can not be set.  
All the receive interrupt are inhibited.  
14.5.5.5 Extended Baud Rate Generation  
A muted receiver may be awakened by one of the  
following two ways:  
The extended prescaler option gives a very fine  
tuning on the baud rate, using a 255 value prescal-  
er, whereas the conventional Baud Rate Genera-  
tor retains industry standard software compatibili-  
ty.  
– by Idle Line detection if the WAKE bit is reset,  
– by Address Mark detection if the WAKE bit is set.  
Receiver wakes-up by Idle Line detection when  
the Receive line has recognised an Idle Frame.  
Then the RWU bit is reset by hardware but the  
IDLE bit is not set.  
The extended baud rate generator block diagram  
is described in the Figure 3..  
The output clock rate sent to the transmitter or to  
the receiver will be the output from the 16 divider  
divided by a factor ranging from 1 to 255 set in the  
ERPR or the ETPR register.  
Receiver wakes-up by Address Mark detection  
when it received a “1” as the most significant bit of  
a word, thus indicating that the message is an ad-  
dress. The reception of this particular word wakes  
up the receiver, resets the RWU bit and sets the  
RDRF bit, which allows the receiver to receive this  
word normally and to use it as an address word.  
Note: the extended prescaler is activated by set-  
ting the ETPR or ERPR register to a value other  
91/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.5.6 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on SCI.  
WAIT  
SCI interrupts cause the device to exit from Wait mode.  
SCI registers are frozen.  
HALT  
In Halt mode, the SCI stops transmitting/receiving until Halt mode is exited.  
14.5.7 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Transmit Data Register Empty  
Transmission Complete  
TDRE  
TC  
TIE  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
TCIE  
Received Data Ready to be Read  
Overrrun Error Detected  
Idle Line Detected  
RDRF  
OR  
RIE  
ILIE  
IDLE  
The SCI interrupt events are connected to the  
same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter).  
These events generate an interrupt if the corre-  
sponding Enable Control Bit is set and the inter-  
rupt mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruc-  
tion).  
92/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
14.5.8 Register Description  
STATUS REGISTER (SR)  
Note: The IDLE bit will not be set again until the  
RDRF bit has been set itself (i.e. a new idle line oc-  
curs). This bit is not set by an idle line when the re-  
ceiver wakes up from wake-up mode.  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1100 0000 (C0h)  
Bit 3 = OR Overrun error.  
7
0
-
This bit is set by hardware when the word currently  
being received in the shift register is ready to be  
transferred into the RDR register while RDRF=1.  
An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the CR2 reg-  
ister. It is cleared by a software sequence (an ac-  
cess to the SR register followed by a read to the  
DR register).  
TDRE  
TC  
RDRF IDLE  
OR  
NF  
FE  
Bit 7 = TDRE Transmit data register empty.  
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the  
TDR register has been transferred into the shift  
register. An interrupt is generated if the TIE =1 in  
the CR2 register. It is cleared by a software se-  
quence (an access to the SR register followed by a  
write to the DR register).  
0: No Overrun error  
1: Overrun error is detected  
Note: When this bit is set RDR register content will  
not be lost but the shift register will be overwritten.  
0: Data is not transferred to the shift register  
1: Data is transferred to the shift register  
Bit 2 = NF Noise flag.  
Note: data will not be transferred to the shift regis-  
ter as long as the TDRE bit is not reset.  
This bit is set by hardware when noise is detected  
on a received frame. It is cleared by a software se-  
quence (an access to the SR register followed by a  
read to the DR register).  
0: No noise is detected  
1: Noise is detected  
Bit 6 = TC Transmission complete.  
This bit is set by hardware when transmission of a  
frame containing Data, a Preamble or a Break is  
complete. An interrupt is generated if TCIE=1 in  
the CR2 register. It is cleared by a software se-  
quence (an access to the SR register followed by a  
write to the DR register).  
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it ap-  
pears at the same time as the RDRF bit which it-  
self generates an interrupt.  
0: Transmission is not complete  
1: Transmission is complete  
Bit 1 = FE Framing error.  
This bit is set by hardware when a de-synchroniza-  
tion, excessive noise or a break character is de-  
tected. It is cleared by a software sequence (an  
access to the SR register followed by a read to the  
DR register).  
0: No Framing error is detected  
1: Framing error or break character is detected  
Bit 5 = RDRF Received data ready flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the  
RDR register has been transferred into the DR  
register. An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the  
CR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence  
(an access to the SR register followed by a read to  
the DR register).  
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it ap-  
pears at the same time as the RDRF bit which it-  
self generates an interrupt. If the word currently  
being transferred causes both frame error and  
overrun error, it will be transferred and only the OR  
bit will be set.  
0: Data is not received  
1: Received data is ready to be read  
Bit 4 = IDLE Idle line detect.  
This bit is set by hardware when a Idle Line is de-  
tected. An interrupt is generated if the ILIE=1 in  
the CR2 register. It is cleared by a software se-  
quence (an access to the SR register followed by a  
read to the DR register).  
Bit 0 = Unused.  
0: No Idle Line is detected  
1: Idle Line is detected  
93/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CR1)  
Read/Write  
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever TC=1 in  
the SR register  
Reset Value: Undefined  
Bit 5 = RIE Receiver interrupt enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever OR=1  
or RDRF=1 in the SR register  
7
0
-
R8  
T8  
-
M
WAKE  
-
-
Bit 7 = R8 Receive data bit 8.  
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the received  
word when M=1.  
Bit 4 = ILIE Idle line interrupt enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever IDLE=1  
in the SR register.  
Bit 6 = T8 Transmit data bit 8.  
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the transmit-  
ted word when M=1.  
Bit 3 = TE Transmitter enable.  
This bit enables the transmitter and assigns the  
TDO pin to the alternate function. It is set and  
cleared by software.  
0: Transmitter is disabled, the TDO pin is back to  
the I/O port configuration.  
Bit 4 = M Word length.  
This bit determines the word length. It is set or  
cleared by software.  
0: 1 Start bit, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit  
1: 1 Start bit, 9 Data bits, 1 Stop bit  
1: Transmitter is enabled  
Note: during transmission, a “0” pulse on the TE  
bit (“0” followed by “1”) sends a preamble after the  
current word.  
Bit 3 = WAKE Wake-Up method.  
This bit determines the SCI Wake-Up method, it is  
set or cleared by software.  
0: Idle Line  
Bit 2 = RE Receiver enable.  
This bit enables the receiver. It is set and cleared  
by software.  
1: Address Mark  
0: Receiver is disabled.  
1: Receiver is enabled and begins searching for a  
start bit.  
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (CR2)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Bit 1 = RWU Receiver wake-up.  
7
0
This bit determines if the SCI is in mute mode or  
not. It is set and cleared by software and can be  
cleared by hardware when a wake-up sequence is  
recognized.  
TIE  
TCIE  
RIE  
ILIE  
TE  
RE  
RWU  
SBK  
0: Receiver in active mode  
1: Receiver in mute mode  
Bit 7 = TIE Transmitter interrupt enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever  
TDRE=1 in the SR register.  
Bit 0 = SBK Send break.  
This bit set is used to send break characters. It is  
set and cleared by software.  
0: No break character is transmitted  
1: Break characters are transmitted  
Bit 6 = TCIE Transmission complete interrupt ena-  
ble  
Note: If the SBK bit is set to “1” and then to “0”, the  
transmitter will send a BREAK word at the end of  
the current word.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: interrupt is inhibited  
94/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
DATA REGISTER (DR)  
Bit 5:3 = SCT[2:0] SCI Transmitter rate divisor  
Read/Write  
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP1 & SCP0  
bits define the total division applied to the bus  
clock to yield the transmit rate clock in convention-  
al Baud Rate Generator mode.  
Reset Value: Undefined  
Contains the Received or Transmitted data char-  
acter, depending on whether it is read from or writ-  
ten to.  
TR dividing factor  
SCT2  
SCT1  
SCT0  
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
7
0
4
DR7  
DR6  
DR5  
DR4  
DR3  
DR2  
DR1  
DR0  
8
The Data register performs a double function (read  
and write) since it is composed of two registers,  
one for transmission (TDR) and one for reception  
(RDR).  
The TDR register provides the parallel interface  
between the internal bus and the output shift reg-  
ister (see Figure 1.).  
The RDR register provides the parallel interface  
between the input shift register and the internal  
bus (see Figure 1.).  
16  
32  
64  
128  
Note: this TR factor is used only when the ETPR  
fine tuning factor is equal to 00h; otherwise, TR is  
replaced by the ETPR dividing factor.  
Bit 2:0 = SCR[2:0] SCI Receiver rate divisor.  
BAUD RATE REGISTER (BRR)  
Read/Write  
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP1 & SCP0  
bits define the total division applied to the bus  
clock to yield the receive rate clock in conventional  
Baud Rate Generator mode.  
Reset Value: 00xx xxxx (XXh)  
7
0
RR dividing factor  
SCR2  
SCR1  
SCR0  
SCP1 SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1 SCR0  
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Bit 7:6= SCP[1:0] First SCI Prescaler  
These 2 prescaling bits allow several standard  
clock division ranges:  
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
PR Prescaling factor  
SCP1  
SCP0  
1
3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
4
13  
Note: this RR factor is used only when the ERPR  
fine tuning factor is equal to 00h; otherwise, RR is  
replaced by the ERPR dividing factor.  
95/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
EXTENDED RECEIVE PRESCALER DIVISION  
REGISTER (ERPR)  
EXTENDED TRANSMIT PRESCALER DIVISION  
REGISTER (ETPR)  
Read/Write  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value:0000 0000 (00h)  
Allows setting of the Extended Prescaler rate divi-  
sion factor for the receive circuit.  
Allows setting of the External Prescaler rate divi-  
sion factor for the transmit circuit.  
7
0
7
0
ERPR ERPR ERPR ERPR ERPR ERPR ERPR ERPR  
ETPR ETPR ETPR ETPR ETPR ETPR ETPR ETPR  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Bit 7:1 = ERPR[7:0] 8-bit Extended Receive Pres-  
caler Register.  
Bit 7:1 = ETPR[7:0] 8-bit Extended Transmit Pres-  
caler Register.  
The extended Baud Rate Generator is activated  
when a value different from 00h is stored in this  
register. Therefore the clock frequency issued  
from the 16 divider (see Figure 3.) is divided by the  
binary factor set in the ERPR register (in the range  
1 to 255).  
The extended Baud Rate Generator is activated  
when a value different from 00h is stored in this  
register. Therefore the clock frequency issued  
from the 16 divider (see Figure 3.) is divided by the  
binary factor set in the ETPR register (in the range  
1 to 255).  
The extended baud rate generator is not used af-  
ter a reset.  
The extended baud rate generator is not used af-  
ter a reset.  
Table 18. SCI Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SCISR  
Reset Value  
TDRE  
1
TC  
1
RDRF  
0
IDLE  
0
OR  
0
NF  
0
FE  
0
0050h  
0051h  
0052h  
0053h  
0054h  
0055h  
0057h  
0
SCIDR  
Reset Value  
MSB  
x
LSB  
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
SCIBRR  
Reset Value  
SOG  
0
VPOL  
x
2FHDET HVSEL VCORDIS CLPINV  
BLKINV  
x
0
x
x
x
x
SCICR1  
Reset Value  
R8  
x
T8  
x
M
x
WAKE  
x
0
0
0
0
SCICR2  
Reset Value  
TIE  
0
TCIE  
0
RIE  
0
ILIE  
0
TE  
0
RE  
0
RWU  
0
SBK  
0
SCIPBRR  
Reset Value  
MSB  
0
LSB  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SCIPBRT  
Reset Value  
MSB  
0
LSB  
0
96/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
14.6 8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC)  
14.6.1 Introduction  
14.6.3 Functional Description  
14.6.3.1 Analog Power Supply  
The on-chip Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) pe-  
ripheral is a 8-bit, successive approximation con-  
verter with internal sample and hold circuitry. This  
peripheral has up to 16 multiplexed analog input  
channels (refer to device pin out description) that  
allow the peripheral to convert the analog voltage  
levels from up to 16 different sources.  
V
and V  
are the high and low level refer-  
SSA  
DDA  
ence voltage pins. In some devices (refer to device  
pin out description) they are internally connected  
to the V and V pins.  
DD  
SS  
Conversion accuracy may therefore be impacted  
by voltage drops and noise in the event of heavily  
loaded or badly decoupled power supply lines.  
The result of the conversion is stored in a 8-bit  
Data Register. The A/D converter is controlled  
through a Control/Status Register.  
See electrical characteristics section for more de-  
tails.  
14.6.2 Main Features  
8-bit conversion  
Up to 16 channels with multiplexed input  
Linear successive approximation  
Data register (DR) which contains the results  
Conversion complete status flag  
On/off bit (to reduce consumption)  
The block diagram is shown in Figure 51.  
Figure 51. ADC Block Diagram  
f
f
ADC  
CPU  
DIV 2  
COCO  
0
ADON  
4
0
CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0  
ADCCSR  
AIN0  
AIN1  
HOLD CONTROL  
R
ADC  
ANALOG TO DIGITAL  
CONVERTER  
ANALOG  
MUX  
AINx  
C
ADC  
ADCDR  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
97/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)  
14.6.3.2 Digital A/D Conversion Result  
The analog input ports must be configured as in-  
put, no pull-up, no interrupt. Refer to the «I/O  
ports» chapter. Using these pins as analog inputs  
does not affect the ability of the port to be read as  
a logic input.  
The conversion is monotonic, meaning that the re-  
sult never decreases if the analog input does not  
and never increases if the analog input does not.  
If the input voltage (V ) is greater than or equal  
AIN  
In the CSR register:  
to V  
(high-level voltage reference) then the  
DDA  
conversion result in the DR register is FFh (full  
– Select the CH[3:0] bits to assign the analog  
channel to be converted.  
scale) without overflow indication.  
If input voltage (V ) is lower than or equal to  
ADC Conversion  
AIN  
V
(low-level voltage reference) then the con-  
SSA  
In the CSR register:  
version result in the DR register is 00h.  
– Set the ADON bit to enable the A/D converter  
and to start the first conversion. From this time  
on, the ADC performs a continuous conver-  
sion of the selected channel.  
The A/D converter is linear and the digital result of  
the conversion is stored in the ADCDR register.  
The accuracy of the conversion is described in the  
parametric section.  
When a conversion is complete  
R
is the maximum recommended impedance  
– The COCO bit is set by hardware.  
– No interrupt is generated.  
– The result is in the DR register and remains  
valid until the next conversion has ended.  
AIN  
for an analog input signal. If the impedance is too  
high, this will result in a loss of accuracy due to  
leakage and sampling not being completed in the  
alloted time.  
A write to the CSR register (with ADON set) aborts  
the current conversion, resets the COCO bit and  
starts a new conversion.  
14.6.3.3 A/D Conversion Phases  
The A/D conversion is based on two conversion  
phases as shown in Figure 52:  
Sample capacitor loading [duration: t  
Figure 52. ADC Conversion Timings  
]
LOAD  
During this phase, the V  
measured is loaded into the C  
input voltage to be  
AIN  
ADON  
sample  
ADC  
ADCCSR WRITE  
OPERATION  
t
CONV  
capacitor.  
A/D conversion [duration: t  
]
CONV  
During this phase, the A/D conversion is  
computed (8 successive approximations cycles)  
HOLD  
CONTROL  
and the C  
sample capacitor is disconnected  
ADC  
from the analog input pin to get the optimum  
t
LOAD  
COCO BIT SET  
analog to digital conversion accuracy.  
While the ADC is on, these two phases are contin-  
uously repeated.  
14.6.4 Low Power Modes  
At the end of each conversion, the sample capaci-  
tor is kept loaded with the previous measurement  
load. The advantage of this behaviour is that it  
minimizes the current consumption on the analog  
pin in case of single input channel measurement.  
Mode  
WAIT  
Description  
No effect on A/D Converter  
A/D Converter disabled.  
After wakeup from Halt mode, the A/D Con-  
verter requires a stabilisation time before ac-  
curate conversions can be performed.  
HALT  
14.6.3.4 Software Procedure  
Refer to the control/status register (CSR) and data  
register (DR) in Section 14.6.6 for the bit defini-  
tions and to Figure 52 for the timings.  
Note: The A/D converter may be disabled by reset-  
ting the ADON bit. This feature allows reduced  
power consumption when no conversion is needed  
and between single shot conversions.  
ADC Configuration  
The total duration of the A/D conversion is 12 ADC  
14.6.5 Interrupts  
clock periods (1/f  
=2/f  
).  
ADC  
CPU  
None  
98/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)  
14.6.6 Register Description  
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (CSR)  
Read/Write  
DATA REGISTER (DR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
7
0
COCO  
0
ADON  
0
CH3  
CH2  
CH1  
CH0  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Bit 7 = COCO Conversion Complete  
This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by soft-  
ware reading the result in the DR register or writing  
to the CSR register.  
0: Conversion is not complete  
1: Conversion can be read from the DR register  
Bits 7:0 = D[7:0] Analog Converted Value  
This register contains the converted analog value  
in the range 00h to FFh.  
Note: Reading this register reset the COCO flag.  
Bit 6 = Reserved. must always be cleared.  
Bit 5 = ADON A/D Converter On  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: A/D converter is switched off  
1: A/D converter is switched on  
Bit 4 = Reserved. must always be cleared.  
Bits 3:0 = CH[3:0] Channel Selection  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
select the analog input to convert.  
Channel Pin*  
CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0  
AIN0  
AIN1  
AIN2  
AIN3  
AIN4  
AIN5  
AIN6  
AIN7  
AIN8  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
AIN9  
AIN10  
AIN11  
AIN12  
AIN13  
AIN14  
AIN15  
*Note: The number of pins AND the channel selec-  
tion varies according to the device. Refer to the de-  
vice pinout.  
99/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)  
Table 19. ADC Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ADCDR  
Reset Value  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
0070h  
0071h  
ADCCSR  
Reset Value  
COCO  
0
ADON  
0
CH3  
0
CH2  
0
CH1  
0
CH0  
0
0
0
100/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
15 INSTRUCTION SET  
15.1 ST7 ADDRESSING MODES  
so, most of the addressing modes may be subdi-  
vided in two sub-modes called long and short:  
The ST7 Core features 17 different addressing  
modes which can be classified in 7 main groups:  
– Long addressing mode is more powerful be-  
cause it can use the full 64 Kbyte address space,  
however it uses more bytes and more CPU cy-  
cles.  
Addressing Mode  
Inherent  
Example  
nop  
– Short addressing mode is less powerful because  
it can generally only access page zero (0000h -  
00FFh range), but the instruction size is more  
compact, and faster. All memory to memory in-  
structions use short addressing modes only  
(CLR, CPL, NEG, BSET, BRES, BTJT, BTJF,  
INC, DEC, RLC, RRC, SLL, SRL, SRA, SWAP)  
Immediate  
Direct  
ld A,#$55  
ld A,$55  
Indexed  
ld A,($55,X)  
ld A,([$55],X)  
jrne loop  
Indirect  
Relative  
Bit operation  
bset byte,#5  
The ST7 Assembler optimizes the use of long and  
short addressing modes.  
The ST7 Instruction set is designed to minimize  
the number of bytes required per instruction: To do  
Table 20. ST7 Addressing Mode Overview  
Pointer  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Pointer  
Size  
(Hex.)  
Destination/  
Source  
Length  
(Bytes)  
Mode  
Syntax  
Inherent  
Immediate  
Short  
nop  
+ 0  
+ 1  
+ 1  
+ 2  
ld A,#$55  
ld A,$10  
Direct  
Direct  
00..FF  
Long  
ld A,$1000  
0000..FFFF  
+ 0 (with X register)  
+ 1 (with Y register)  
No Offset  
Direct  
Indexed  
ld A,(X)  
00..FF  
Short  
Long  
Short  
Long  
Short  
Long  
Relative  
Relative  
Bit  
Direct  
Indexed  
Indexed  
ld A,($10,X)  
ld A,($1000,X)  
ld A,[$10]  
00..1FE  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 3  
Direct  
0000..FFFF  
00..FF  
Indirect  
Indirect  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
byte  
word  
byte  
word  
ld A,[$10.w]  
ld A,([$10],X)  
0000..FFFF  
00..1FE  
Indirect Indexed  
Indirect Indexed  
Direct  
ld A,([$10.w],X) 0000..FFFF  
1)  
1)  
jrne loop  
PC-128/PC+127  
Indirect  
jrne [$10]  
PC-128/PC+127  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
byte  
byte  
byte  
Direct  
bset $10,#7  
bset [$10],#7  
Bit  
Indirect  
00..FF  
Bit  
Direct  
Relative btjt $10,#7,skip 00..FF  
Bit  
Indirect Relative btjt [$10],#7,skip 00..FF  
Note 1. At the time the instruction is executed, the Program Counter (PC) points to the instruction follow-  
ing JRxx.  
101/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
ST7 ADDRESSING MODES (Cont’d)  
15.1.1 Inherent  
15.1.3 Direct  
All Inherent instructions consist of a single byte.  
The opcode fully specifies all the required informa-  
tion for the CPU to process the operation.  
In Direct instructions, the operands are referenced  
by their memory address.  
The direct addressing mode consists of two sub-  
modes:  
Inherent Instruction  
Function  
No operation  
Direct (short)  
NOP  
The address is a byte, thus requires only one byte  
after the opcode, but only allows 00 - FF address-  
ing space.  
TRAP  
S/W Interrupt  
Wait For Interrupt (Low Power  
Mode)  
WFI  
Direct (long)  
Halt Oscillator (Lowest Power  
Mode)  
HALT  
The address is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte ad-  
dressing space, but requires 2 bytes after the op-  
code.  
RET  
Sub-routine Return  
Interrupt Sub-routine Return  
Set Interrupt Mask  
Reset Interrupt Mask  
Set Carry Flag  
IRET  
SIM  
15.1.4 Indexed (No Offset, Short, Long)  
RIM  
In this mode, the operand is referenced by its  
memory address, which is defined by the unsigned  
addition of an index register (X or Y) with an offset.  
SCF  
RCF  
Reset Carry Flag  
Reset Stack Pointer  
Load  
The indirect addressing mode consists of three  
sub-modes:  
RSP  
LD  
Indexed (No Offset)  
CLR  
Clear  
There is no offset, (no extra byte after the opcode),  
and allows 00 - FF addressing space.  
PUSH/POP  
INC/DEC  
TNZ  
Push/Pop to/from the stack  
Increment/Decrement  
Test Negative or Zero  
1 or 2 Complement  
Byte Multiplication  
Indexed (Short)  
The offset is a byte, thus requires only one byte af-  
ter the opcode and allows 00 - 1FE addressing  
space.  
CPL, NEG  
MUL  
Indexed (long)  
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,  
RRC  
Shift and Rotate Operations  
Swap Nibbles  
The offset is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte ad-  
dressing space and requires 2 bytes after the op-  
code.  
SWAP  
15.1.2 Immediate  
Immediate instructions have two bytes, the first  
byte contains the opcode, the second byte con-  
tains the operand value.  
15.1.5 Indirect (Short, Long)  
The required data byte to do the operation is found  
by its memory address, located in memory (point-  
er).  
Immediate Instruction  
Function  
The pointer address follows the opcode. The indi-  
rect addressing mode consists of two sub-modes:  
LD  
Load  
CP  
Compare  
Indirect (short)  
BCP  
Bit Compare  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
byte, thus allowing 00 - FF addressing space, and  
requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
AND, OR, XOR  
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC  
Logical Operations  
Arithmetic Operations  
Indirect (long)  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
102/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
ST7 ADDRESSING MODES (Cont’d)  
15.1.6 Indirect Indexed (Short, Long)  
SWAP  
CALL, JP  
Swap Nibbles  
This is a combination of indirect and short indexed  
addressing modes. The operand is referenced by  
its memory address, which is defined by the un-  
signed addition of an index register value (X or Y)  
with a pointer value located in memory. The point-  
er address follows the opcode.  
Call or Jump subroutine  
15.1.7 Relative Mode (Direct, Indirect)  
This addressing mode is used to modify the PC  
register value by adding an 8-bit signed offset to it.  
Available Relative Direct/  
Function  
The indirect indexed addressing mode consists of  
two sub-modes:  
Indirect Instructions  
JRxx  
Conditional Jump  
Call Relative  
Indirect Indexed (Short)  
CALLR  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
byte, thus allowing 00 - 1FE addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
The relative addressing mode consists of two sub-  
modes:  
Indirect Indexed (Long)  
Relative (Direct)  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
The offset follows the opcode.  
Relative (Indirect)  
The offset is defined in memory, of which the ad-  
dress follows the opcode.  
Table 21. Instructions Supporting Direct,  
Indexed, Indirect and Indirect Indexed  
Addressing Modes  
Long and Short  
Function  
Instructions  
LD  
Load  
CP  
Compare  
AND, OR, XOR  
Logical Operations  
Arithmetic Addition/subtrac-  
tion operations  
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC  
BCP  
Bit Compare  
Short Instructions Only  
CLR  
Function  
Clear  
INC, DEC  
Increment/Decrement  
Test Negative or Zero  
1 or 2 Complement  
Bit Operations  
TNZ  
CPL, NEG  
BSET, BRES  
Bit Test and Jump Opera-  
tions  
BTJT, BTJF  
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,  
RRC  
Shift and Rotate Operations  
103/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
15.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS  
The ST7 family devices use an Instruction Set  
consisting of 63 instructions. The instructions may  
be subdivided into 13 main groups as illustrated in  
the following table:  
Load and Transfer  
LD  
CLR  
POP  
DEC  
TNZ  
OR  
Stack operation  
PUSH  
INC  
RSP  
BCP  
Increment/Decrement  
Compare and Tests  
Logical operations  
CP  
AND  
BSET  
BTJT  
ADC  
SLL  
XOR  
CPL  
NEG  
Bit Operation  
BRES  
BTJF  
ADD  
SRL  
JRT  
Conditional Bit Test and Branch  
Arithmetic operations  
Shift and Rotates  
SUB  
SRA  
JRF  
SBC  
RLC  
JP  
MUL  
RRC  
CALL  
SWAP  
CALLR  
SLA  
Unconditional Jump or Call  
Conditional Branch  
JRA  
JRxx  
TRAP  
SIM  
NOP  
RET  
Interruption management  
Condition Code Flag modification  
WFI  
RIM  
HALT  
SCF  
IRET  
RCF  
Using a pre-byte  
The instructions are described with one to four  
bytes.  
These prebytes enable instruction in Y as well as  
indirect addressing modes to be implemented.  
They precede the opcode of the instruction in X or  
the instruction using direct addressing mode. The  
prebytes are:  
In order to extend the number of available op-  
codes for an 8-bit CPU (256 opcodes), three differ-  
ent prebyte opcodes are defined. These prebytes  
modify the meaning of the instruction they pre-  
cede.  
PDY 90 Replace an X based instruction using  
immediate, direct, indexed, or inherent  
addressing mode by a Y one.  
The whole instruction becomes:  
PC-2 End of previous instruction  
PC-1 Prebyte  
PIX 92 Replace an instruction using direct, di-  
rect bit, or direct relative addressing  
mode to an instruction using the corre-  
sponding indirect addressing mode.  
It also changes an instruction using X  
indexed addressing mode to an instruc-  
tion using indirect X indexed addressing  
mode.  
PC  
Opcode  
PC+1 Additional word (0 to 2) according to the  
number of bytes required to compute the  
effective address  
PIY 91 Replace an instruction using X indirect  
indexed addressing mode by a Y one.  
104/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
INSTRUCTION GROUPS (Cont’d)  
Mnemo  
ADC  
ADD  
AND  
BCP  
Description  
Add with Carry  
Function/Example  
A = A + M + C  
A = A + M  
Dst  
Src  
H
H
H
I
N
N
N
N
N
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
C
C
A
M
M
M
M
Addition  
A
Logical And  
A = A . M  
A
Bit compare A, Memory  
Bit Reset  
tst (A . M)  
A
BRES  
BSET  
BTJF  
BTJT  
CALL  
CALLR  
CLR  
bres Byte, #3  
bset Byte, #3  
btjf Byte, #3, Jmp1  
btjt Byte, #3, Jmp1  
M
M
M
M
Bit Set  
Jump if bit is false (0)  
Jump if bit is true (1)  
Call subroutine  
Call subroutine relative  
Clear  
C
C
reg, M  
reg  
0
N
N
N
1
Z
Z
Z
CP  
Arithmetic Compare  
One Complement  
Decrement  
tst(Reg - M)  
A = FFH-A  
dec Y  
M
C
1
CPL  
reg, M  
reg, M  
DEC  
HALT  
IRET  
INC  
Halt  
0
I
Interrupt routine return  
Increment  
Pop CC, A, X, PC  
inc X  
H
N
N
Z
Z
C
reg, M  
JP  
Absolute Jump  
Jump relative always  
Jump relative  
jp [TBL.w]  
JRA  
JRT  
JRF  
Never jump  
jrf *  
JRIH  
JRIL  
Jump if ext. interrupt = 1  
Jump if ext. interrupt = 0  
Jump if H = 1  
JRH  
H = 1 ?  
JRNH  
JRM  
Jump if H = 0  
H = 0 ?  
Jump if I = 1  
I = 1 ?  
JRNM  
JRMI  
JRPL  
JREQ  
JRNE  
JRC  
Jump if I = 0  
I = 0 ?  
Jump if N = 1 (minus)  
Jump if N = 0 (plus)  
Jump if Z = 1 (equal)  
Jump if Z = 0 (not equal)  
Jump if C = 1  
N = 1 ?  
N = 0 ?  
Z = 1 ?  
Z = 0 ?  
C = 1 ?  
JRNC  
JRULT  
Jump if C = 0  
C = 0 ?  
Jump if C = 1  
Unsigned <  
Jmp if unsigned >=  
Unsigned >  
JRUGE Jump if C = 0  
JRUGT Jump if (C + Z = 0)  
105/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
INSTRUCTION GROUPS (Cont’d)  
Mnemo  
JRULE  
LD  
Description  
Jump if (C + Z = 1)  
Load  
Function/Example  
Unsigned <=  
dst <= src  
Dst  
Src  
H
I
N
N
N
N
N
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
reg, M  
A, X, Y  
reg, M  
M, reg  
X, Y, A  
MUL  
NEG  
NOP  
OR  
Multiply  
X,A = X * A  
0
0
Negate (2's compl)  
No Operation  
OR operation  
Pop from the Stack  
neg $10  
C
A = A + M  
pop reg  
pop CC  
push Y  
C = 0  
A
M
POP  
reg  
CC  
M
M
M
H
I
C
0
PUSH  
RCF  
RET  
RIM  
Push onto the Stack  
Reset carry flag  
Subroutine Return  
Enable Interrupts  
Rotate left true C  
Rotate right true C  
Reset Stack Pointer  
Subtract with Carry  
Set carry flag  
reg, CC  
I = 0  
0
RLC  
RRC  
RSP  
SBC  
SCF  
SIM  
C <= Dst <= C  
C => Dst => C  
S = Max allowed  
A = A - M - C  
C = 1  
reg, M  
reg, M  
N
N
Z
Z
C
C
A
M
N
Z
C
1
Disable Interrupts  
Shift left Arithmetic  
Shift left Logic  
I = 1  
1
SLA  
C <= Dst <= 0  
C <= Dst <= 0  
0 => Dst => C  
Dst7 => Dst => C  
A = A - M  
reg, M  
reg, M  
reg, M  
reg, M  
A
N
N
0
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
C
C
C
C
SLL  
SRL  
SRA  
SUB  
SWAP  
TNZ  
TRAP  
WFI  
Shift right Logic  
Shift right Arithmetic  
Subtraction  
N
N
N
N
M
SWAP nibbles  
Dst[7..4] <=> Dst[3..0] reg, M  
tnz lbl1  
Test for Neg & Zero  
S/W trap  
S/W interrupt  
1
0
Wait for Interrupt  
Exclusive OR  
XOR  
A = A XOR M  
A
M
N
Z
106/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
16.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS  
Unless otherwise specified, all voltages are re-  
16.1.5 Pin input voltage  
ferred to V  
.
SS  
The input voltage measurement on a pin of the de-  
vice is described in Figure 54.  
16.1.1 Minimum and Maximum values  
Unless otherwise specified the minimum and max-  
imum values are guaranteed in the worst condi-  
tions of ambient temperature, supply voltage and  
frequencies by tests in production on 100% of the  
Figure 54. Pin input voltage  
devices with an ambient temperature at T =25°C  
A
ST7 PIN  
and T =T max (given by the selected temperature  
A
A
range).  
V
Data based on characterization results, design  
simulation and/or technology characteristics are  
indicated in the table footnotes and are not tested  
in production. Based on characterization, the min-  
imum and maximum values refer to sample tests  
and represent the mean value plus or minus three  
times the standard deviation (mean±3Σ).  
IN  
16.1.2 Typical values  
Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based  
on T =25°C, V =5V (for the 4.5VV 5.5V  
A
DD  
DD  
voltage range) and V =3.3V (for the 3VV 4V  
DD  
DD  
voltage range). They are given only as design  
guidelines and are not tested.  
16.1.3 Typical curves  
Unless otherwise specified, all typical curves are  
given only as design guidelines and are not tested.  
16.1.4 Loading capacitor  
The loading conditions used for pin parameter  
measurement are shown in Figure 53.  
Figure 53. Pin loading conditions  
ST7 PIN  
C
L
107/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Stresses above those listed as “absolute maxi-  
mum ratings” may cause permanent damage to  
the device. This is a stress rating only and func-  
tional operation of the device under these condi-  
tions is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect device  
reliability.  
16.2.1 Voltage Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Maximum value  
Unit  
V
- V  
- V  
Supply voltage  
6.5  
6.5  
DD  
SS  
V
Analog Reference Voltage  
DDA  
SSA  
V
Input voltage on true open drain pin  
Input voltage on any other pin  
VSS-0.3 to 6.5  
VSS-0.3 to VDD+0.3  
50  
1) & 2)  
V
IN  
|V  
| and |V  
|
Variations between different digital power pins  
DDx  
SSx  
mV  
V
|V  
- V  
DDA  
DDX  
SSA  
Variations between digital and analog power pins  
50  
- V  
|
SSx  
V
Electro-static discharge voltage (Human Body Model)  
Electro-static discharge voltage (Machine Model)  
see Section 16.7.2 "Absolute Electri-  
cal Sensitivity" on page 124  
ESD(HBM)  
V
ESD(MM)  
16.2.2 Current Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Maximum value  
Unit  
3)  
3)  
I
Total current into V power lines (source)  
150  
150  
25  
VDD  
DD  
I
Total current out of V ground lines (sink)  
SS  
VSS  
Output current sunk by any standard I/O and control pin  
Output current sunk by any high sink I/O pin  
Output current source by any I/Os and control pin  
Injected current on ISPSEL pin  
I
50  
IO  
- 25  
± 5  
± 5  
± 5  
± 5  
± 20  
mA  
Injected current on RESET pin  
2) & 4)  
I
INJ(PIN)  
Injected current on OSC1 and OSC2 pins  
5) & 6)  
Injected current on any other pin  
2)  
5)  
ΣI  
Total injected current (sum of all I/O and control pins)  
INJ(PIN)  
Notes:  
1. Directly connecting the RESET and I/O pins to V or V could damage the device if an unintentional internal reset  
DD  
SS  
is generated or an unexpected change of the I/O configuration occurs (for example, due to a corrupted program counter).  
To guarantee safe operation, this connection has to be done through a pull-up or pull-down resistor (typical: 4.7kfor  
RESET, 10kfor I/Os). Unused I/O pins must be tied in the same way to V or V according to their reset configuration.  
DD  
SS  
2. When the current limitation is not possible, the V absolute maximum rating must be respected, otherwise refer to  
IN  
I
specification. A positive injection is induced by V >V while a negative injection is induced by V <V  
.
INJ(PIN)  
IN  
DD  
IN  
SS  
3. All power (V ) and ground (V ) lines must always be connected to the external supply.  
DD  
SS  
4. Negative injection disturbs the analog performance of the device. In particular, it induces leakage currents throughout  
the device including the analog inputs. To avoid undesirable effects on the analog functions, care must be taken:  
- Analog input pins must have a negative injection less than 0.8 mA (assuming that the impedance of the analog voltage  
is lower than the specified limits)  
- Pure digital pins must have a negative injection less than 1.6mA. In addition, it is recommended to inject the current as  
far as possible from the analog input pins.  
5. When several inputs are submitted to a current injection, the maximum ΣI  
is the absolute sum of the positive  
INJ(PIN)  
and negative injected currents (instantaneous values). These results are based on characterisation with ΣI  
maxi-  
INJ(PIN)  
mum current injection on four I/O port pins of the device.  
6. True open drain I/O port pins do not accept positive injection.  
108/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS (Cont’d)  
16.2.3 Thermal Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Storage temperature range  
Value  
Unit  
T
-65 to +150  
°C  
STG  
Maximum junction temperature (see Section 18 "DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDER-  
ING INFORMATION" on page 144 )  
T
J
109/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS  
16.3.1 General Operating Conditions  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Supply voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
V
see Figure 55 and Figure 56  
3.2  
5.5  
V
DD  
V
V
3.5V for ROM devices  
4.5V for FLASH devices  
1)  
DD  
DD  
0
16  
f
External clock frequency  
MHz  
OSC  
1)  
V
3.2V  
0
8
DD  
1 Suffix Version  
6 Suffix Version  
7 Suffix Version  
3 Suffix Version  
0
70  
-40  
-40  
-40  
85  
T
Ambient temperature range  
°C  
2)  
A
105  
125  
Figure 55. f  
Maximum Operating Frequency Versus VDD Supply Voltage for ROM devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
IN THIS AREA AT T > 85°C  
A
16  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
12  
8
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
1)  
WITH RESONATOR  
4
1
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2)  
2.5  
3.2  
3.5  
3.85 4  
4.5  
5
5.5  
Figure 56. f  
Maximum Operating Frequency Versus VDD Supply Voltage for FLASH devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
f
[MHz]  
IN THIS AREA AT T > 85°C  
FUNCTIONALITY  
GUARANTEED  
OSC  
A
3)  
IN THIS AREA  
16  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
12  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
8
4
1)  
WITH RESONATOR  
1
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2.5  
3.2  
3.5  
3.85  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Notes:  
1. Guaranteed by construction. A/D operation and resonator oscillator start-up are not guaranteed below 1MHz.  
2. Operating conditions with T =-40 to +125°C.  
A
3. FLASH programming tested in production at maximum T with two different conditions: V =5.5V, f =6MHz and  
CPU  
A
DD  
V
=3.2V, f  
=4MHz.  
CPU  
DD  
110/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
OPERATING CONDITIONS (Cont’d)  
16.3.2 Operating Conditions with Low Voltage Detector (LVD)  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T .  
DD OSC  
A
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
2)  
High Threshold  
Med. Threshold  
Low Threshold  
4.10  
3.75  
3.25  
4.30  
3.90  
3.35  
4.50  
4.05  
3.55  
2)  
2)  
V
Reset release threshold (V rise)  
IT+  
DD  
V
2)  
2)  
High Threshold  
3.85  
3.50  
4.05  
3.65  
3.10  
4.30  
3.95  
3.35  
V
V
Reset generation threshold (V fall) Med. Threshold  
IT-  
DD  
4)  
Low Threshold  
-V  
3.00  
200  
0.2  
LVD voltage threshold hysteresis  
V
250  
300  
50  
mV  
V/ms  
ns  
hys  
IT+ IT-  
3)  
Vt  
V
rise time rate  
POR  
DD  
2)  
t
Filtered glitch delay on V  
Not detected by the LVD  
40  
g(VDD)  
DD  
3)  
Figure 57. High LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for FLASH devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY AND RESET NOT GUARANTEED IN THIS AREA  
FOR TEMPERATURES HIGHER THAN 85°C  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
12  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
V
3.85  
IT-  
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3)  
Figure 58. Medium LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for FLASH devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY AND RESET NOT GUARANTEED IN THIS AREA  
FOR TEMPERATURES HIGHER THAN 85°C  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
12  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2.5  
3
V
IT-3.5V  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
2)4)  
Figure 59. Low LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for FLASH devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY NOT GUARANTEED IN THIS AREA  
FOR TEMPERATURES HIGHER THAN 85°C  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
12  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
SEE NOTE 4  
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2.5  
V
IT-3V 3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Notes:  
1. LVD typical data are based on T =25°C. They are given only as design guidelines and are not tested.  
A
2. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
3. The V rise time rate condition is needed to insure a correct device power-on and LVD reset. Not tested in production.  
DD  
4.If the low LVD threshold is selected, when V falls below 3.2V, (V minimum operating voltage), the device is guar-  
DD  
DD  
anteed to continue functioning until it goes into reset state. The specified V min. value is necessary in the device power  
DD  
on phase, but during a power down phase or voltage drop the device will function below this min. level.  
111/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
FUNCTIONAL OPERATING CONDITIONS (Cont’d)  
2)  
Figure 60. High LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for ROM devices  
OSC  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
V
IT-  
3.85  
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
5.5  
5.5  
2)  
Figure 61. Medium LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for ROM devices  
OSC  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2.5  
3
V
IT-3.5V  
4
4.5  
5
2)3)  
Figure 62. Low LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for ROM devices  
OSC  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2.5  
V
IT-3.00V  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
Notes:  
1. LVD typical data are based on T =25°C. They are given only as design guidelines and are not tested.  
A
2. The minimum V rise time rate is needed to insure a correct device power-on and LVD reset. Not tested in production.  
DD  
3. If the low LVD threshold is selected, when V falls below 3.2V, (V minimum operating voltage), the device is guar-  
DD  
DD  
anteed to continue functioning until it goes into reset state. The specified V min. value is necessary in the device power  
DD  
on phase, but during a power down phase or voltage drop the device will function below this min. level.  
112/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.4 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS  
The following current consumption specified for  
the ST7 functional operating modes over tempera-  
ture range does not take into account the clock  
source current consumption. To get the total de-  
vice consumption, the two current values must be  
added (except for HALT mode for which the clock  
is stopped).  
Symbol  
I  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Max  
Unit  
Supply current variation vs. temperature  
Constant V and f  
10  
%
DD(Ta)  
DD  
CPU  
16.4.1 RUN and SLOW Modes  
1)  
2)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=1MHz  
=2MHz  
=4MHz  
1.2  
2.1  
3.9  
7.4  
1.8  
3.5  
7.0  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
3)  
Supply current in RUN mode  
(see Figure 63)  
=16MHz, f  
=8MHz  
14.0  
CPU  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=62.5kHz  
=125kHz  
=250kHz  
0.4  
0.5  
0.7  
1.0  
0.9  
1.1  
1.4  
2.0  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
4)  
Supply current in SLOW mode  
(see Figure 64)  
=16MHz, f  
=500kHz  
CPU  
I
mA  
DD  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=1MHz  
=2MHz  
=4MHz  
0.3  
0.8  
1.6  
3.5  
1
1.5  
3
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
3)  
Supply current in RUN mode  
(see Figure 63)  
=16MHz, f  
=8MHz  
7
CPU  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=62.5kHz  
=125kHz  
=250kHz  
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.5  
0.3  
0.5  
0.6  
1.0  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
4)  
Supply current in SLOW mode  
(see Figure 64)  
=16MHz, f  
=500kHz  
CPU  
Figure 63. Typical I in RUN vs. f  
Figure 64. Typical I in SLOW vs. f  
CPU  
DD  
CPU  
DD  
IDD [mA]  
IDD [mA]  
8
500kHz  
250kHz  
125kHz  
62.5kHz  
1.2  
8MHz  
4MHz  
2MHz  
1MHz  
7
6
5
1
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
4
3
2
1
0
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VDD [V]  
VDD [V]  
Notes:  
1. Typical data are based on T =25°C, V =5V (4.5VV 5.5V range) and V =3.4V (3.2VV 3.6V range).  
A
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at V max. and f  
max.  
DD  
CPU  
3. CPU running with memory access, all I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V or V (no load), all peripherals  
DD  
SS  
in reset state; clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, CSS and LVD disabled.  
4. SLOW mode selected with f  
SS  
based on f  
divided by 32. All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V or  
CPU  
OSC DD  
V
(no load), all peripherals in reset state; clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, CSS and LVD disabled.  
113/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.4.2 WAIT and SLOW WAIT Modes  
1)  
2)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=1MHz  
=2MHz  
=4MHz  
0.35  
0.7  
1.3  
2.5  
0.6  
1.2  
2.1  
4.0  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
3)  
Supply current in WAIT mode  
(see Figure 65)  
=16MHz, f  
=8MHz  
CPU  
mA  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=62.5kHz  
=125kHz  
=250kHz  
0.05  
0.1  
0.2  
0.5  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
1.0  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
4)  
Supply current in SLOW WAIT mode  
(see Figure 66)  
=16MHz, f  
=500kHz  
CPU  
I
DD  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
=1MHz  
=2MHz  
=4MHz  
45  
100  
300  
600  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
3)  
Supply current in WAIT mode  
(see Figure 65)  
150  
300  
500  
=16MHz, f  
=8MHz  
1000  
CPU  
µA  
f
f
f
f
=2MHz, f  
=4MHz, f  
=8MHz, f  
6
40  
80  
120  
20  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
4)  
Supply current in SLOW WAIT mode  
(see Figure 66)  
100  
160  
250  
=16MHz, f  
Figure 65. Typical I in WAIT vs. f  
Figure 66. Typical I in SLOW-WAIT vs. f  
CPU  
DD  
CPU  
DD  
IDD [mA]  
IDD [mA]  
8MHz  
4MHz  
2MHz  
1MHz  
500kHz  
250kHz  
125kHz  
62.5kHz  
3
2.5  
2
0.35  
0.3  
0.25  
0.2  
1.5  
1
0.15  
0.1  
0.5  
0
0.05  
0
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VDD [V]  
VDD [V]  
Notes:  
1. Typical data are based on T =25°C, V =5V (4.5VV 5.5V range) and V =3.4V (3.2VV 3.6V range).  
A
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at V max. and f  
max.  
DD  
CPU  
3. All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V or V (no load), all peripherals in reset state; clock input (OSC1)  
DD  
SS  
driven by external square wave, CSS and LVD disabled.  
4. SLOW-WAIT mode selected with f  
based on f  
divided by 32. All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at  
CPU  
OSC  
V
or V (no load), all peripherals in reset state; clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, CSS and LVD  
DD  
SS  
disabled.  
114/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.4.3 HALT and ACTIVE-HALT Modes  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
-40°CT +85°C  
Typ  
<2  
Max  
10  
Unit  
A
V
V
=5.5V  
=3.6V  
DD  
-40°CT +125°C  
150  
6
A
2)  
Supply current in HALT mode  
I
-40°CT +85°C  
µA  
DD  
A
DD  
-40°CT +125°C  
100  
150  
A
3)  
Supply current in ACTIVE-HALT mode  
50  
16.4.4 Supply and Clock Managers  
The previous current consumption specified for  
the ST7 functional operating modes over tempera-  
ture range does not take into account the clock  
source current consumption. To get the total de-  
vice consumption, the two current values must be  
added (except for HALT mode).  
1)  
4)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Supply current of internal RC oscillator  
Supply current of external RC oscillator  
500  
525  
750  
750  
5)  
200  
300  
450  
700  
400  
550  
750  
LP: Low power oscillator  
I
DD(CK)  
MP: Medium power oscillator  
MS: Medium speed oscillator  
HS: High speed oscillator  
5) & 6)  
Supply current of resonator oscillator  
µA  
1000  
Clock security system supply current  
LVD supply current  
150  
100  
350  
150  
I
HALT mode  
DD(LVD)  
16.4.5 On-Chip Peripherals  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
50  
Unit  
V
V
V
V
V
V
=3.4V  
=5.0V  
=3.4V  
=5.0V  
=3.4V  
=5.0V  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
7)  
I
16-bit Timer supply current  
f
f
f
=8MHz  
=8MHz  
=4MHz  
DD(TIM)  
CPU  
CPU  
ADC  
150  
250  
350  
800  
1100  
8)  
I
SPI supply current  
ADC supply current when converting  
µA  
DD(SPI)  
9)  
I
DD(ADC)  
Notes:  
1. Typical data are based on T =25°C.  
A
2. All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V or V (no load), CSS and LVD disabled. Data based on charac-  
DD  
SS  
CPU  
terization results, tested in production at V max. and f  
max.  
DD  
3. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production. All I/O pins in input mode  
with a static value at V or V (no load); clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, LVD disabled.  
DD  
SS  
4. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
5. Data based on characterization results done with the external components specified in Section 16.5.3 and Section  
16.5.4, not tested in production.  
6. As the oscillator is based on a current source, the consumption does not depend on the voltage.  
7. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration (timer counter running at f  
/4) and timer  
DD  
CPU  
counter stopped (selecting external clock capability). Data valid for one timer.  
8. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration and a permanent SPI master communica-  
DD  
tion (data sent equal to 55h).  
9. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration and continuous A/D conversions.  
DD  
115/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T .  
DD OSC  
A
16.5.1 General Timings  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
2
Typ  
Max  
12  
Unit  
tCPU  
ns  
3
t
Instruction cycle time  
c(INST)  
f
f
=8MHz  
250  
10  
375  
1500  
22  
CPU  
2)  
tCPU  
µs  
Interrupt reaction time  
t
v(IT)  
t
= t  
+ 10  
=8MHz  
1.25  
2.75  
v(IT)  
c(INST)  
CPU  
16.5.2 External Clock Source  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
0.7xV  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V
OSC1 input pin high level voltage  
OSC1 input pin low level voltage  
V
DD  
OSC1H  
DD  
SS  
V
V
V
0.3xV  
OSC1L  
DD  
t
t
3)  
w(OSC1H)  
see Figure 67  
OSC1 high or low time  
15  
w(OSC1L)  
ns  
t
t
3)  
r(OSC1)  
OSC1 rise or fall time  
15  
±1  
f(OSC1)  
I
OSCx Input leakage current  
V
V V  
DD  
µA  
L
SS  
IN  
Figure 67. Typical Application with an External Clock Source  
90%  
VOSC1H  
10%  
VOSC1L  
tf(OSC1)  
tw(OSC1H)  
tr(OSC1)  
tw(OSC1L)  
OSC2  
Not connected internally  
fOSC  
EXTERNAL  
CLOCK SOURCE  
IL  
OSC1  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Data based on typical application software.  
2. Time measured between interrupt event and interrupt vector fetch. tc(INST) is the number of tCPU cycles needed to finish  
the current instruction execution.  
3. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.  
116/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.5.3 Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Oscillators  
The ST7 internal clock can be supplied with four  
different Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators. All  
the information given in this paragraph are based  
on characterization results with specified typical  
external components. In the application, the reso-  
nator and the load capacitors have to be placed as  
close as possible to the oscillator pins in order to  
minimize output distortion and start-up stabiliza-  
tion time. Refer to the crystal/ceramic resonator  
manufacturer for more details (frequency, pack-  
age, accuracy...).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
MHz  
kΩ  
LP: Low power oscillator  
1
2
4
8
MP: Medium power oscillator  
MS: Medium speed oscillator  
HS: High speed oscillator  
>2  
>4  
>8  
3)  
f
Oscillator Frequency  
OSC  
16  
R
Feedback resistor  
20  
40  
F
R =200Ω  
LP oscillator  
MP oscillator  
MS oscillator  
HS oscillator  
38  
32  
18  
15  
56  
46  
26  
21  
S
Recommended load capacitance ver-  
sus equivalent serial resistance of the  
C
C
R =200Ω  
L1  
L2  
S
pF  
R =200Ω  
S
crystal or ceramic resonator (R )  
S
R =100Ω  
S
V
=5V  
LP oscillator  
MP oscillator  
MS oscillator  
HS oscillator  
40  
100  
190  
360  
700  
DD  
V =V  
110  
180  
400  
IN  
SS  
i
OSC2 driving current  
µA  
2
16.5.3.1 Typical Crystal Resonators  
Option  
C
C
L2  
t
L1  
SU(osc)  
1)  
Byte  
Reference  
Freq.  
Characteristic  
2)  
[ms]  
[pF] [pF]  
Config.  
2MHz  
4MHz  
LP  
MP  
MS  
HS  
S-200-30-30/50  
f  
f  
f  
f  
=[±30ppm  
=[±30ppm  
=[±30ppm  
=[±30ppm  
,±30ppm ], Typ. R =200Ω  
33 34 10~15  
33 34 7~10  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
25°C  
25°C  
25°C  
25°C  
Ta  
S
SS3-400-30-30/30  
SS3-800-30-30/30  
SS3-1600-30-30/30  
,±30ppm ], Typ. R =60Ω  
Ta S  
8MHz  
,±30ppm ], Typ. R =25Ω  
33 34 2.5~3  
33 34 1~1.5  
Ta  
S
16MHz  
,±30ppm ], Typ. R =15Ω  
Ta  
S
Figure 68. Application with a Crystal Resonator  
i
2
fOSC  
CL1  
OSC1  
RESONATOR  
R
F
CL2  
OSC2  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Resonator characteristics given by the crystal manufacturer.  
2. t is the typical oscillator start-up time measured between V =2.8V and the fetch of the first instruction (with a  
SU(OSC)  
DD  
quick V ramp-up from 0 to 5V (<50µs).  
DD  
3. The oscillator selection can be optimized in terms of supply current using an high quality resonator with small R value.  
S
Refer to crystal manufacturer for more details.  
117/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.5.3.2 Typical Ceramic Resonators  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
2MHz  
Typ  
4.2  
2.1  
1.1  
0.7  
Unit  
LP  
MP  
MS  
HS  
4MHz  
8MHz  
t
Ceramic resonator start-up time  
ms  
SU(osc)  
16MHz  
Note:  
t
is the typical oscillator start-up time measured between V =2.8V and the fetch of the first instruction (with a  
DD  
DD  
SU(OSC)  
quick V ramp-up from 0 to 5V (<50µs).  
Figure 69. Application with Ceramic Resonator  
WHEN RESONATOR WITH  
INTEGRATED CAPACITORS  
i
2
fOSC  
CL1  
OSC1  
RESONATOR  
R
R
F(EXT)  
F
CL2  
OSC2  
ST72XXX  
R
D
Notes:  
1. Resonator characteristics given by the ceramic resonator manufacturer.  
2. t is the typical oscillator start-up time measured between V =2.8V and the fetch of the first instruction (with a  
SU(OSC)  
DD  
quick V ramp-up from 0 to 5V (<50µs).  
DD  
3. The oscillator selection can be optimized in terms of supply current using an high quality resonator with small R value.  
S
Refer to Table 22 and Table 23 and to the ceramic resonator manufacturer’s documentation for more details.  
118/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Table 22. Typical Ceramic Resonators  
f
C
C
R
R
D
Option Byte  
Config.  
OSC  
L1  
3
L2  
3
FEXT  
1)  
Resonator Part Number  
(MHz)  
[pF]  
[pF]  
kΩ  
[k]  
CSB1000JA  
1
100  
100  
3.3  
CSBF1000JA  
LP  
MP  
MS  
CSTS0200MGA06  
CSTCC2.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0200MGA06  
CSTCC2.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0400MGA06  
CSTCC4.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0400MGA06  
CSTCC4.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0800MGA06  
CSTCC8.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0800MGA06  
CSTCC8.00MGA0H6  
CST10.0MTWA  
2
2
4
(47)  
(47)  
4
Open  
8
0
8
30  
(15)  
30  
30  
(15)  
30  
10  
12  
CSTCC10.0MGA  
CST12.0MTWA  
HS  
CSTCS12.0MTA  
(30)  
15  
(30)  
15  
CSA16.00MXZA040  
CST16.00MXWA0C3  
CSACV16.00MXA040Q  
CSTCV16.00MXA0H3Q  
(15)  
15  
(15)  
15  
2)  
16  
10  
(15)  
(15)  
Table 23. Resonator Frequency Correlation Factor  
Option  
Byte  
Config.  
Corre-  
lation  
%
Option  
Byte  
Config.  
Corre-  
lation  
%
Refer-  
ence IC  
Refer-  
ence IC  
1)  
1)  
Resonator  
Resonator  
CSB1000JA  
+0.03  
-0.20  
-0.16  
-0.21  
-0.19  
0.02  
4069UBE  
CSTS0400MGA06  
CSTCC4.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0800MGA06  
CSTCC4.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0800MGA06  
CSTCC8.00MGA0H6  
CSTS10.0MTWA  
CSTCC10.0MGA  
CST12.0MTWA  
-0.03  
-0.05  
+0.03  
+0.02  
+0.02  
+0.01  
+0.38  
+0.61  
+0.38  
+0.42  
+0.10  
CSTS0200MGA06  
CSTCC2.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0200MGA06  
CSTCC2.00MGA0H6  
CSTS0400MGA06  
CSTCC4.00MGA0H6  
LP  
MS  
74HCU04  
74HCU04  
MP  
-0.05  
HS  
4069UBE  
74HCU04  
CSTCS12.0MTA  
CSA16.00MXZA040  
CSACV16.00MXA040Q +0.08  
Notes:  
1. Murata Ceralock  
2. V 4.5 to 5.5V  
DD  
3. Values in parentheses refer to the capacitors integrated in the resonator  
119/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CLOCK CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.5.4 RC Oscillators  
The ST7 internal clock can be supplied with an RC  
oscillator. This oscillator can be used with internal  
or external components (selectable by option  
byte).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
see Figure 71  
Min  
3.60  
1
Typ  
Max  
5.10  
14  
Unit  
1)  
Internal RC oscillator frequency  
f
MHz  
OSC  
2)  
External RC oscillator frequency  
Internal RC Oscillator Start-up Time  
3)  
2.0  
R
R
R
R
=47KΩ, C =”0”pF  
1.0  
6.5  
0.7  
3.0  
EX  
EX  
EX  
EX  
EX  
t
ms  
=47KΩ, C =100pF  
SU(OSC)  
3)  
EX  
External RC Oscillator Start-up Time  
=10KΩ, C =6.8pF  
EX  
=10KΩ, C =470pF  
EX  
4)  
R
C
Oscillator external resistor  
10  
47  
KΩ  
EX  
EX  
see Figure 72  
5)  
Oscillator external capacitor  
0
470  
pF  
Figure 70. Typical Application with RC oscillator  
ST72XXX  
VDD  
INTERNAL RC  
Current copy  
fOSC  
EXTERNAL RC  
+
-
V
REF  
REX  
OSC1  
OSC2  
CEX  
Voltage generator  
CEX discharge  
Figure 71. Typical Internal RC Oscillator  
Figure 72. Typical External RC Oscillator  
fosc [MHz]  
Rex=10KOhm  
fosc [MHz]  
-40°C  
+25°C  
+85°C  
20  
15  
10  
5
Rex=15KOhm  
Rex=22KOhm  
Rex=33KOhm  
Rex=39KOhm  
Rex=47KOhm  
4.3  
4.2  
4.1  
4
+125°C  
3.9  
3.8  
0
3.2  
5.5  
0
6.8  
22  
47  
100  
270  
470  
VDD [V]  
Cex [pF]  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results.  
2. Guaranteed frequency range with the specified C and R ranges taking into account the device process variation.  
EX  
EX  
Data based on design simulation.  
3. Data based on characterization results done with V nominal at 5V, not tested in production.  
DD  
4. R must have a positive temperature coefficient (ppm/°C), carbon resistors should therefore not be used.  
EX  
5. Important: when no external C is applied, the capacitance to be considered is the global parasitic capacitance which  
EX  
is subject to high variation (package, application...). In this case, the RC oscillator frequency tuning has to be done by  
trying out several resistor values.  
120/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CLOCK CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.5.5 Clock Security System (CSS)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
T =25°C, V =5.0V  
Min  
250  
190  
Typ  
340  
260  
30  
Max  
550  
450  
Unit  
kHz  
A
DD  
1)  
f
f
Safe Oscillator Frequency  
SFOSC  
GFOSC  
T =25°C, V =3.4V  
A
DD  
2)  
Glitch Filtered Frequency  
MHz  
Figure 73. Typical Safe Oscillator Frequencies  
fosc [kHz]  
400  
-40°C  
+25°C  
+85°C  
+125°C  
350  
300  
250  
200  
3.2  
5.5  
VDD [V]  
Note:  
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production between 90KHz and 600KHz.  
2. Filtered glitch on the f signal. See functional description in Section 9.4 on page 31 for more details.  
OSC  
121/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.6 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS  
16.6.1 RAM and Hardware Registers  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
1)  
V
Data retention mode  
HALT mode (or RESET)  
1.6  
V
RM  
16.6.2 EEPROM Data Memory  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
20  
Unit  
-40°CT +85°C  
A
3)  
t
Programming time for 1~16 bytes  
ms  
prog  
-40°CT +125°C  
25  
A
5)  
4)  
t
Data retention  
T =+55°C  
20  
Years  
ret  
A
5)  
N
Write erase cycles  
T =+25°C  
300 000  
Cycles  
RW  
A
16.6.3 FLASH Program Memory  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
25  
8
Max  
70  
Unit  
°C  
2)  
0
T
Programming temperature range  
Programming time for 1~16 bytes  
A(prog)  
3)  
T =+25°C  
25  
ms  
A
t
prog  
T =+25°C  
2.1  
6.4  
Programming time for 4 or 8kBytes  
sec  
A
5)  
4)  
t
Data retention  
T =+55°C  
20  
years  
cycles  
ret  
A
5)  
N
Write erase cycles  
T =+25°C  
100  
RW  
A
Notes:  
1. Minimum V supply voltage without losing data stored in RAM (in HALT mode or under RESET) or in hardware reg-  
DD  
isters (only in HALT mode). Guaranteed by construction, not tested in production.  
2. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at T =25°C.  
A
3. Up to 16 bytes can be programmed at a time for a 4kBytes FLASH block (then up to 32 bytes at a time for an 8k device)  
4. The data retention time increases when the T decreases.  
A
5. Data based on reliability test results and monitored in production.  
122/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.7 EMC CHARACTERISTICS  
Susceptibility tests are performed on a sample ba-  
sis during product characterization.  
ESD: Electro-Static Discharge (positive and  
negative) is applied on all pins of the device until  
a functional disturbance occurs. This test  
conforms with the IEC 1000-4-2 standard.  
16.7.1 Functional EMS  
(Electro Magnetic Susceptibility)  
FTB: A Burst of Fast Transient voltage (positive  
Based on a simple running application on the  
product (toggling 2 LEDs through I/O ports), the  
product is stressed by two electro magnetic events  
until a failure occurs (indicated by the LEDs).  
and negative) is applied to V and V through  
DD  
SS  
a 100pF capacitor, until a functional disturbance  
occurs. This test conforms with the IEC 1000-4-  
4 standard.  
A device reset allows normal operations to be re-  
sumed.  
1)  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
=5V, T =+25°C, f  
conforms to IEC 1000-4-2  
Neg  
Pos  
Unit  
Voltage limits to be applied on any I/O pin  
to induce a functional disturbance  
V
=8MHz  
OSC  
DD  
A
V
-1  
1
FESD  
kV  
Fast transient voltage burst limits to be ap-  
V
=5V, T =+25°C, f  
=8MHz  
OSC  
DD  
A
V
plied through 100pF on V and V pins  
-4  
4
FFTB  
DD  
DD  
conforms to IEC 1000-4-4  
to induce a functional disturbance  
2)  
Figure 74. EMC Recommended star network power supply connection  
ST72XXX  
10µF 0.1µF  
VDD  
ST7  
DIGITAL NOISE  
FILTERING  
VSS  
VDD  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
SOURCE  
VSSA  
EXTERNAL  
NOISE  
FILTERING  
VDDA  
0.1µF  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
2. The suggested 10µF and 0.1µF decoupling capacitors on the power supply lines are proposed as a good price vs. EMC  
performance trade-off. They have to be put as close as possible to the device power supply pins. Other EMC recommen-  
dations are given in other sections (I/Os, RESET, OSCx pin characteristics).  
123/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.7.2 Absolute Electrical Sensitivity  
Machine Model Test Sequence  
Based on three different tests (ESD, LU and DLU)  
using specific measurement methods, the product  
is stressed in order to determine its performance in  
terms of electrical sensitivity. For more details, re-  
fer to the AN1181 ST7 application note.  
– C is loaded through S1 by the HV pulse gener-  
ator.  
L
– S1 switches position from generator to ST7.  
– A discharge from C to the ST7 occurs.  
L
– S2 must be closed 10 to 100ms after the pulse  
delivery period to ensure the ST7 is not left in  
charge state. S2 must be opened at least 10ms  
prior to the delivery of the next pulse.  
16.7.2.1 Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)  
Electro-Static Discharges (3 positive then 3 nega-  
tive pulses separated by 1 second) are applied to  
the pins of each sample according to each pin  
combination. The sample size depends of the  
number of supply pins of the device (3 parts*(n+1)  
supply pin). Two models are usually simulated:  
Human Body Model and Machine Model. This test  
conforms to the JESD22-A114A/A115A standard.  
See Figure 75 and the following test sequences.  
– R (machine resistance), in series with S2, en-  
sures a slow discharge of the ST7.  
Human Body Model Test Sequence  
– C is loaded through S1 by the HV pulse gener-  
L
ator.  
– S1 switches position from generator to R.  
– A discharge from C through R (body resistance)  
L
to the ST7 occurs.  
– S2 must be closed 10 to 100ms after the pulse  
delivery period to ensure the ST7 is not left in  
charge state. S2 must be opened at least 10ms  
prior to the delivery of the next pulse.  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
1)  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Conditions  
Maximum value  
Unit  
Electro-static discharge voltage  
(Human Body Model)  
T =+25°C  
V
3000  
A
ESD(HBM)  
V
Electro-static discharge voltage  
(Machine Model)  
T =+25°C  
V
400  
A
ESD(MM)  
Figure 75. Typical Equivalent ESD Circuits  
S1  
R=1500Ω  
S1  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
PULSE  
GENERATOR  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
PULSE  
GENERATOR  
ST7  
ST7  
CL=100pF  
S2  
S2  
CL=200pF  
HUMAN BODY MODEL  
MACHINE MODEL  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
124/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.7.2.2 Static and Dynamic Latch-Up  
should be noted that good EMC performance is  
highly dependent on the user application and the  
software in particular.  
LU: 3 complementary static tests are required  
on 10 parts to assess the latch-up performance.  
A supply overvoltage (applied to each power  
supply pin), a current injection (applied to each  
input, output and configurable I/O pin) and a  
power supply switch sequence are performed  
on each sample. This test conforms to the EIA/  
JESD 78 IC latch-up standard. For more details,  
refer to the AN1181 ST7 application note.  
DLU: Electro-Static Discharges (one positive  
then one negative test) are applied to each pin  
of 3 samples when the micro is running to  
assess the latch-up performance in dynamic  
mode. Power supplies are set to the typical  
values, the oscillator is connected as near as  
possible to the pins of the micro and the  
component is put in reset mode. This test  
conforms to the IEC1000-4-2 and SAEJ1752/3  
standards and is described in Figure 76. For  
more details, refer to the AN1181 ST7  
application note.  
Therefore it is recommended that the user applies  
EMC software optimization and prequalification  
tests in relation with the EMC level requested for  
his application.  
Software recommendations:  
The software flowchart must include the manage-  
ment of runaway conditions such as:  
– Corrupted program counter  
– Unexpected reset  
– Critical Data corruption (control registers...)  
Prequalification trials:  
Most of the common failures (unexpected reset  
and program counter corruption) can be repro-  
duced by manually forcing a low state on the RE-  
SET pin or the Oscillator pins for 1 second.  
To complete these trials, ESD stress can be ap-  
plied directly on the device, over the range of  
specification values. When unexpected behaviour  
is detected, the software can be hardened to pre-  
vent unrecoverable errors occurring (see applica-  
tion note AN1015).  
16.7.2.3 Designing hardened software to avoid  
noise problems  
EMC characterization and optimization are per-  
formed at component level with a typical applica-  
tion environment and simplified MCU software. It  
Electrical Sensitivities  
1)  
Symbol  
LU  
Parameter  
Static latch-up class  
Dynamic latch-up class  
Conditions  
Class  
T =+25°C  
A
A
A
T =+85°C  
A
V
=5.5V, f  
=4MHz, T =+25°C  
DLU  
A
DD  
OSC  
A
Figure 76. Simplified Diagram of the ESD Generator for DLU  
RCH=50MΩ  
RD=330Ω  
DISCHARGE TIP  
VDD  
VSS  
HV RELAY  
CS=150pF  
ST7  
ESD  
GENERATOR 2)  
DISCHARGE  
RETURN CONNECTION  
Notes:  
1. Class description: A Class is an STMicroelectronics internal specification. All its limits are higher than the JEDEC spec-  
ifications, that means when a device belongs to Class A it exceeds the JEDEC standard. B Class strictly covers all the  
JEDEC criteria (international standard).  
2. Schaffner NSG435 with a pointed test finger.  
125/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.7.3 ESD Pin Protection Strategy  
Standard Pin Protection  
To protect an integrated circuit against Electro-  
Static Discharge the stress must be controlled to  
prevent degradation or destruction of the circuit el-  
ements. The stress generally affects the circuit el-  
ements which are connected to the pads but can  
also affect the internal devices when the supply  
pads receive the stress. The elements to be pro-  
tected must not receive excessive current, voltage  
or heating within their structure.  
To protect the output structure the following ele-  
ments are added:  
– A diode to V (3a) and a diode from V (3b)  
DD  
SS  
– A protection device between V and V (4)  
DD  
SS  
To protect the input structure the following ele-  
ments are added:  
– A resistor in series with the pad (1)  
– A diode to V (2a) and a diode from V (2b)  
DD  
SS  
– A protection device between V and V (4)  
An ESD network combines the different input and  
output ESD protections. This network works, by al-  
lowing safe discharge paths for the pins subjected  
to ESD stress. Two critical ESD stress cases are  
presented in Figure 77 and Figure 78 for standard  
pins and in Figure 79 and Figure 80 for true open  
drain pins.  
DD  
SS  
Figure 77. Positive Stress on a Standard Pad vs. V  
SS  
VDD  
VDD  
(3a)  
(2a)  
(1)  
(4)  
OUT  
IN  
Main path  
(3b)  
(2b)  
Path to avoid  
VSS  
VSS  
Figure 78. Negative Stress on a Standard Pad vs. V  
DD  
VDD  
VDD  
(3a)  
(2a)  
(1)  
(4)  
OUT  
IN  
Main path  
(3b)  
(2b)  
VSS  
VSS  
126/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Multisupply Configuration  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
True Open Drain Pin Protection  
The centralized protection (4) is not involved in the  
discharge of the ESD stresses applied to true  
open drain pads due to the fact that a P-Buffer and  
When several types of ground (V , V  
, ...) and  
SSA  
SS  
power supply (V , V  
, ...) are available for any  
DD  
DDA  
reason (better noise immunity...), the structure  
shown in Figure 81 is implemented to protect the  
device against ESD.  
diode to V  
local protection between the pad and V  
are not implemented. An additional  
DD  
(5a &  
SS  
5b) is implemented to completely absorb the posi-  
tive ESD discharge.  
Figure 79. Positive Stress on a True Open Drain Pad vs. V  
SS  
VDD  
VDD  
Main path  
(1)  
OUT  
(4)  
IN  
Path to avoid  
(5a)  
(5b)  
(3b)  
(2b)  
VSS  
VSS  
Figure 80. Negative Stress on a True Open Drain Pad vs. V  
DD  
VDD  
VDD  
Main path  
(1)  
OUT  
(4)  
IN  
(3b)  
(3b)  
(3b)  
(2b)  
VSS  
VSS  
Figure 81. Multisupply Configuration  
VDD  
VDDA  
VDDA  
VSS  
BACK TO BACK DIODE  
BETWEEN GROUNDS  
VSSA  
VSSA  
127/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS  
16.8.1 General Characteristics  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
DD OSC  
A
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V
2)  
V
Input low level voltage  
Input high level voltage  
0.3xVDD  
IL  
2)  
V
0.7xVDD  
IH  
3)  
V
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis  
Input leakage current  
400  
mV  
µA  
hys  
I
V
SSV V  
±1  
L
IN  
DD  
4)  
I
Static current consumption  
Floating input mode  
200  
250  
300  
S
V
V
=5V  
62  
120  
200  
5
DD  
DD  
5)  
R
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor  
V =V  
SS  
kΩ  
pF  
ns  
PU  
IN  
=3.3V  
170  
C
I/O pin capacitance  
IO  
6)  
t
t
Output high to low level fall time  
25  
C =50pF  
Between 10% and 90%  
f(IO)out  
r(IO)out  
L
6)  
Output low to high level rise time  
25  
7)  
t
External interrupt pulse time  
1
t
CPU  
w(IT)in  
Figure 82. Two typical Applications with unused I/O Pin  
VDD  
ST72XXX  
UNUSED I/O PORT  
10kΩ  
10kΩ  
UNUSED I/O PORT  
ST72XXX  
Figure 83. Typical I vs. V with V =V  
PU  
DD  
IN  
SS  
Ipu [µA]  
70  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
60  
Ta=125°C  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Notes:  
1. Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based on T =25°C and V =5V.  
A
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
3. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels. Based on characterization results, not tested.  
4. Configuration not recommended, all unused pins must be kept at a fixed voltage: using the output mode of the I/O for  
example or an external pull-up or pull-down resistor (see Figure 82). Data based on design simulation and/or technology  
characteristics, not tested in production.  
5. The R pull-up equivalent resistor is based on a resistive transistor (corresponding I current characteristics de-  
PU  
PU  
scribed in Figure 83). This data is based on characterization results, tested in production at V max.  
DD  
6. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
7. To generate an external interrupt, a minimum pulse width has to be applied on an I/O port pin configured as an external  
interrupt source.  
128/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.8.2 Output Driving Current  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD OSC  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
=+5mA T 85°C  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.3  
1.5  
IO  
IO  
IO  
IO  
IO  
IO  
A
Output low level voltage for a standard I/O pin  
when 8 pins are sunk at same time  
(see Figure 84 and Figure 87)  
T 85°C  
A
=+2mA T 85°C  
0.65  
0.75  
A
T 85°C  
A
1)  
V
OL  
=+20mA,T 85°C  
1.5  
1.7  
A
Output low level voltage for a high sink I/O pin  
when 4 pins are sunk at same time  
(see Figure 85 and Figure 88)  
T 85°C  
A
V
=+8mA T 85°C  
0.75  
0.85  
A
T 85°C  
A
=-5mA, T 85°C  
V
V
-1.6  
-1.7  
A
DD  
DD  
Output high level voltage for an I/O pin  
when 4 pins are sourced at same time  
(see Figure 86 and Figure 89)  
T 85°C  
A
2)  
V
OH  
V
V
-0.8  
-1.0  
=-2mA T 85°C  
DD  
A
T 85°C  
A
DD  
Figure 84. Typical V at V =5V (standard)  
Figure 86. Typical V  
at V =5V  
OL  
DD  
OH  
DD  
Vol [V] at Vdd=5V  
Voh [V] at Vdd=5V  
6
2.5  
Ta=-40°C  
2
Ta=85°C  
5
4
3
2
1
Ta=25°C  
1.5  
Ta=125°C  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
Ta=125°C  
1
0.5  
0
-8  
-6  
-4  
-2  
0
0
2
4
6
8
10  
Iio [mA]  
Iio [mA]  
Figure 85. Typical V at V =5V (high-sink)  
OL  
DD  
Vol [V] at Vdd=5V  
2
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=85°C  
1.5  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=125°C  
1
0.5  
0
0
5
10  
15  
Iio [mA]  
20  
25  
30  
Notes:  
1. The I current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 16.2.2 and the sum of I  
IO  
IO  
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
.
VSS  
2. The I current sourced must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 16.2.2 and the sum of  
IO  
I
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
. True open drain I/O pins does not have V  
.
IO  
VDD  
OH  
129/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Figure 87. Typical V vs. V (standard I/Os)  
OL  
DD  
Vol [V] at Iio=2mA  
0.5  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
Vol [V] at Iio=5mA  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
1.4  
1.3  
1.2  
1.1  
1
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
Ta=125°C  
Ta=125°C  
0.45  
0.4  
0.35  
0.3  
0.25  
0.2  
3.2  
3.5  
4
Vdd [V]  
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Figure 88. Typical V vs. V (high-sink I/Os)  
OL  
DD  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
Vol [V] at Iio=8mA  
Vol [V] at Iio=20mA  
1.5  
0.55  
0.5  
Ta=125°C  
Ta=125°C  
1.3  
1.1  
0.9  
0.7  
0.5  
0.45  
0.4  
0.35  
0.3  
0.25  
0.2  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
Vdd [V]  
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Figure 89. Typical V  
vs. V  
DD  
OH  
Voh [V] at Iio=-2mA  
Voh [V] at Iio=-5mA  
5
5.5  
5
4
3
2
1
0
4.5  
4
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=85°C  
3.5  
3
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
Ta=25°C  
5
Ta=125°C  
Ta=125°C  
2.5  
2
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Vdd [V]  
130/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.9 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS  
16.9.1 Asynchronous RESET Pin  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
DD OSC  
A
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V
2)  
V
Input low level voltage  
0.3xVDD  
IL  
2)  
V
Input high level voltage  
0.7xVDD  
IH  
3)  
V
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis  
400  
0.68  
0.28  
40  
mV  
V
hys  
4)  
I
I
=+5mA  
=+2mA  
0.95  
0.45  
60  
Output low level voltage  
IO  
IO  
V
V
=5V  
OL  
ON  
DD  
(see Figure 92, Figure 93)  
V
V
=5V  
20  
80  
DD  
DD  
5)  
R
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor  
V =V  
kΩ  
IN  
SS  
=3.4V  
100  
120  
External pin or  
internal reset sources  
6
30  
1/f  
SFOSC  
t
Generated reset pulse duration  
w(RSTL)out  
µs  
6)  
t
t
External reset pulse hold time  
20  
µs  
h(RSTL)in  
g(RSTL)in  
7)  
Filtered glitch duration  
100  
ns  
8)  
Figure 90. Typical Application with RESET pin  
ST72XXX  
VDD  
VDD  
VDD  
INTERNAL  
RESET CONTROL  
RON  
RESET  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
4.7kΩ  
USER  
EXTERNAL  
RESET  
CIRCUIT 8)  
WATCHDOG RESET  
LVD RESET  
Notes:  
1. Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based on T =25°C and V =5V.  
A
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
3. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels. Based on characterization results, not tested.  
4. The I current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 16.2.2 and the sum of I  
IO  
IO  
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
.
VSS  
5. The R  
pull-up equivalent resistor is based on a resistive transistor (corresponding I current characteristics de-  
ON  
ON  
scribed in Figure 91). This data is based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
6. To guarantee the reset of the device, a minimum pulse has to be applied to RESET pin. All short pulses applied on  
RESET pin with a duration below t  
can be ignored.  
h(RSTL)in  
7. The reset network (the resistor and two capacitors) protects the device against parasitic resets, especially in a noisy  
environments.  
8. The output of the external reset circuit must have an open-drain output to drive the ST7 reset pad. Otherwise the device  
can be damaged when the ST7 generates an internal reset (LVD or watchdog).  
131/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Figure 91. Typical I  
vs. V with V =V  
Figure 92. Typical V at V =5V (RESET)  
OL DD  
ON  
DD  
IN  
SS  
Ion [µA]  
Vol [V] at Vdd=5V  
2
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
Ta=125°C  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
200  
150  
100  
50  
Ta=125°C  
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Iio [mA]  
Vdd [V]  
Figure 93. Typical V vs. V (RESET)  
OL  
DD  
Vol [V] at Iio=5mA  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
Vol [V] at Iio=2mA  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
0.55  
0.5  
Ta=125°C  
Ta=125°C  
1.2  
1
0.45  
0.4  
0.35  
0.3  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.25  
0.2  
0.15  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Vdd [V]  
132/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.9.2 ISPSEL Pin  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD OSC  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
V
1)  
V
Input low level voltage  
V
0.2  
IL  
IH  
L
SS  
1)  
V
I
Input high level voltage  
Input leakage current  
V
-0.1 12.6  
±1  
DD  
V =V  
µA  
IN  
SS  
2)  
Figure 94. Two typical Applications with ISPSEL Pin  
ISPSEL  
ISPSEL  
PROGRAMMING  
TOOL  
10kΩ  
ST72XXX  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.  
2. When the ISP Remote mode is not required by the application ISPSEL pin must be tied to V  
.
SS  
133/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.10 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V  
,
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on  
the input/output alternate function characteristics  
(output compare, input capture, external clock,  
PWM output...).  
DD  
f
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
OSC  
A
16.10.1 Watchdog Timer  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Watchdog time-out duration  
Conditions  
Min  
12,288  
1.54  
Typ  
Max  
786,432  
98.3  
Unit  
tCPU  
ms  
t
w(WDG)  
fCPU=8MHz  
16.10.2 16-Bit Timer  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
1
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
t
Input capture pulse time  
t
t
w(ICAP)in  
CPU  
2
CPU  
t
PWM resolution time  
res(PWM)  
f
=8MHz  
250  
0
ns  
CPU  
f
Timer external clock frequency  
PWM repetition rate  
f
f
/4  
/4  
MHz  
MHz  
bit  
EXT  
CPU  
f
0
PWM  
CPU  
Res  
PWM resolution  
16  
PWM  
134/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS  
16.11.1 SPI - Serial Peripheral Interface  
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on  
the input/output alternate function characteristics  
(SS, SCK, MOSI, MISO).  
Subject to general operating conditions for V  
,
DD  
f
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
OSC  
A
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
/128  
0.0625  
Max  
Unit  
Master  
Slave  
f
f
f
/4  
CPU  
2
CPU  
f
=8MHz  
=8MHz  
f
CPU  
SCK  
SPI clock frequency  
MHz  
1/t  
/2  
c(SCK)  
CPU  
0
f
4
CPU  
t
t
r(SCK)  
SPI clock rise and fall time  
see I/O port pin description  
f(SCK)  
t
SS setup time  
SS hold time  
Slave  
Slave  
120  
120  
su(SS)  
t
h(SS)  
t
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
90  
w(SCKH)  
SCK high and low time  
Data input setup time  
Data input hold time  
w(SCKL)  
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
100  
su(MI)  
t
su(SI)  
ns  
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
100  
h(MI)  
t
h(SI)  
t
Data output access time  
Data output disable time  
Data output valid time  
Data output hold time  
Data output valid time  
Data output hold time  
Slave  
Slave  
0
120  
240  
120  
a(SO)  
t
dis(SO)  
t
v(SO)  
h(SO)  
v(MO)  
h(MO)  
Slave (after enable edge)  
t
0
t
0.25  
0.25  
Master (before capture edge)  
t
CPU  
t
Figure 95. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=0 3)  
SS INPUT  
tsu(SS)  
tc(SCK)  
th(SS)  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=1  
tw(SCKH)  
tw(SCKL)  
ta(SO)  
tv(SO)  
th(SO)  
tdis(SO)  
tr(SCK)  
tf(SCK)  
see  
note 2  
MISO OUTPUT  
MSB OUT  
see note 2  
BIT6 OUT  
LSB OUT  
tsu(SI)  
th(SI)  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
BIT1 IN  
MOSI INPUT  
Notes:  
1. Data based on design simulation and/or characterisation results, not tested in production.  
2. When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave mode) has  
its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends on the I/O port configuration.  
3. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV and 0.7xV  
.
DD  
DD  
135/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Figure 96. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=11)  
SS INPUT  
tsu(SS)  
tc(SCK)  
th(SS)  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=1  
tw(SCKH)  
tw(SCKL)  
ta(SO)  
tdis(SO)  
tv(SO)  
th(SO)  
tr(SCK)  
tf(SCK)  
see  
note 2  
see  
note 2  
MISO OUTPUT  
MSB OUT  
BIT6 OUT  
HZ  
LSB OUT  
tsu(SI)  
th(SI)  
LSB IN  
MSB IN  
BIT1 IN  
MOSI INPUT  
Figure 97. SPI Master Timing Diagram 1)  
SS INPUT  
tc(SCK)  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=1  
CPHA=1  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=1  
CPOL=1  
tw(SCKH)  
tw(SCKL)  
tr(SCK)  
tf(SCK)  
th(MI)  
tsu(MI)  
MISO INPUT  
MSB IN  
BIT6 IN  
LSB IN  
tv(MO)  
th(MO)  
LSB OUT  
MSB OUT  
see note 2  
BIT6 OUT  
see note 2  
MOSI OUTPUT  
Notes:  
1. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV and 0.7xV  
.
DD  
DD  
2. When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave mode) has  
its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends of the I/O port configuration.  
136/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
16.11.2 SCI - Serial Communications Interface  
Subject to general operating condition for V , f  
DD O-  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
SC  
A
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on  
the input/output alternate function characteristics  
(RDI and TDO).  
Conditions  
Accuracy  
Baud  
Rate  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Standard  
Unit  
Prescaler  
f
CPU  
vs. Standard  
Conventional Mode  
TR (or RR)=64, PR=13  
TR (or RR)=16, PR=13  
TR (or RR)= 8, PR=13  
TR (or RR)= 4, PR=13  
TR (or RR)= 2, PR=13  
TR (or RR)= 8, PR= 3  
TR (or RR)= 1, PR=13  
300  
~300.48  
1200 ~1201.92  
2400 ~2403.84  
4800 ~4807.69  
9600 ~9615.38  
10400 ~10416.67  
19200 ~19230.77  
~0.16%  
f
f
Tx  
Communication frequency 8MHz  
Hz  
Rx  
Extended Mode  
ETPR (or ERPR) = 13  
38400 ~38461.54  
14400 ~14285.71  
Extended Mode  
ETPR (or ERPR) = 35  
~0.79%  
137/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
16.12 8-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
DD OSC  
A
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
ADC clock frequency  
Conversion range voltage  
External input resistor  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
MHz  
V
f
4
ADC  
2)  
V
R
V
V
AIN  
AIN  
SSA  
DDA  
3)  
10  
kΩ  
C
Internal sample and hold capacitor  
Stabilization time after ADC enable  
Conversion time (Sample+Hold)  
6
pF  
ADC  
STAB  
4)  
t
0
µs  
3
f
=8MHz, f  
=4MHz  
ADC  
CPU  
t
- Sample capacitor loading time  
- Hold conversion time  
4
8
ADC  
1/f  
ADC  
Figure 98. Typical Application with ADC  
VDD  
VT  
0.6V  
RAIN  
AINx  
VAIN  
ADC  
VT  
0.6V  
CIO  
~2pF  
IL  
±1µA  
VDD  
VDDA  
0.1µF  
VSSA  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based on T =25°C and V -V =5V. They are given only as design guide-  
A
DD SS  
lines and are not tested.  
2. When V and V  
pins are not available on the pinout, the ADC refer to V and V .  
SS  
DDA  
SSA  
DD  
3. Any added external serial resistor will downgrade the ADC accuracy (especially for resistance greater than 10k). Data  
based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
4. The stabilization time of the AD converter is masked by the first t  
always valid.  
. The first conversion after the enable is then  
LOAD  
138/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
8-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
ADC Accuracy  
2)  
3)  
3)  
V
f
=5V,  
V
f
=5.0V,  
V
=3.3V,  
DD  
DD  
DD  
=1MHz  
=8MHz  
f
=8MHz  
Symbol  
|E |  
Parameter  
Unit  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
Typ.  
Max  
2.0  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
Typ.  
Max  
2.0  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
Typ  
Max  
2.0  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1)  
Total unadjusted error  
T
1)  
E
E
Offset error  
O
G
1)  
LSB  
Gain Error  
1)  
|E |  
Differential linearity error  
D
1)  
|E |  
Integral linearity error  
L
Figure 99. ADC Accuracy Characteristics  
Digital Result ADCDR  
EG  
(1) Example of an actual transfer curve  
(2) The ideal transfer curve  
(3) End point correlation line  
255  
V
V
254  
253  
DDA  
SSA  
1LSB  
= ----------------------------------------  
IDEAL  
256  
(2)  
E =Total Unadjusted Error: maximum deviation  
T
ET  
between the actual and the ideal transfer curves.  
(3)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
E =Offset Error: deviation between the first actual  
O
transition and the first ideal one.  
(1)  
E =Gain Error: deviation between the last ideal  
G
transition and the last actual one.  
EO  
EL  
E =Differential Linearity Error: maximum deviation  
D
between actual steps and the ideal one.  
E =Integral Linearity Error: maximum deviation  
L
ED  
between any actual transition and the end point  
correlation line.  
1 LSBIDEAL  
V
(LSB  
)
IDEAL  
in  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
253 254 255 256  
VDDA  
VSSA  
Notes:  
1. ADC Accuracy vs. Negative Injection Current:  
For I =0.8mA, the typical leakage induced inside the die is 1.6µA and the effect on the ADC accuracy is a loss of 1 LSB  
INJ-  
for each 10Kincrease of the external analog source impedance. This effect on the ADC accuracy has been observed  
under worst-case conditions for injection:  
- negative injection  
- injection to an Input with analog capability, adjacent to the enabled Analog Input  
- at 5V V supply, and worst case temperature.  
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results with T =25°C.  
A
3. Data based on characterization results over the whole temperature range.  
139/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
17 PACKAGE CHARACTERISTICS  
17.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA  
Figure 100. 64-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package  
A
mm  
inches  
D
Dim.  
A2  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
D1  
A
1.60  
0.063  
0.006  
A1  
b
A1 0.05  
0.15 0.002  
A2 1.35 1.40 1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057  
b
c
0.30 0.37 0.45 0.012 0.015 0.018  
0.09 0.20 0.004 0.008  
D
16.00  
14.00  
16.00  
14.00  
0.80  
0.630  
0.551  
0.630  
0.551  
0.031  
3.5°  
e
D1  
E
E1  
E
E1  
e
θ
0°  
3.5°  
7°  
0°  
7°  
L
0.45 0.60 0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030  
1.00 0.039  
Number of Pins  
64  
L
L1  
L1  
c
N
h
Figure 101. 56-Pin Plastic Dual In-Line Package, Shrink 600-mil Width  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
E
A
6.35  
0.250  
0.195  
A1 0.38  
0.015  
A
A2  
A1  
A2 3.18  
4.95 0.125  
C
E1  
b
0.41  
0.89  
0.016  
0.035  
eA  
eB  
b
e
b2  
b2  
D
E
C
D
E
0.20  
0.38 0.008  
53.21 1.980  
0.015  
2.095  
50.29  
0.015  
15.01  
0.591  
GAGE PLANE  
E1 12.32  
14.73 0.485  
0.580  
e
1.78  
0.070  
0.600  
eA  
eB  
15.24  
eB  
17.78  
0.700  
0.200  
L
2.92  
5.08 0.115  
Number of Pins  
N
56  
140/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA (Cont’d)  
Figure 102. 44-Pin Thin Quad Flat Package  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
A
D
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
D1  
A2  
A
1.60  
0.063  
0.006  
A1 0.05  
0.15 0.002  
A1  
b
A2 1.35 1.40 1.45 0.053 0.055 0.057  
b
C
0.30 0.37 0.45 0.012 0.015 0.018  
0.09  
0.20 0.004 0.000 0.008  
D
12.00  
10.00  
12.00  
10.00  
0.80  
0.472  
0.394  
0.472  
0.394  
0.031  
e
D1  
E
E1  
E
E1  
e
θ
0°  
3.5°  
7°  
0°  
3.5°  
7°  
L
0.45 0.60 0.75 0.018 0.024 0.030  
1.00 0.039  
Number of Pins  
44  
c
L1  
L1  
L
h
N
Figure 103. 42-Pin Plastic Dual In-Line Package, Shrink 600-mil Width  
mm  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
5.08 0.200  
inches  
Dim.  
E
A
A
A2  
A1 0.51  
A2 3.05 3.81 4.57 0.120 0.150 0.180  
0.38 0.46 0.56 0.015 0.018 0.022  
b2 0.89 1.02 1.14 0.035 0.040 0.045  
0.020  
A1  
L
c
E1  
b
b2  
e
b
eA  
eB  
E
D
c
D
E
0.23 0.25 0.38 0.009 0.010 0.015  
36.58 36.83 37.08 1.440 1.450 1.460  
0.015  
15.24  
16.00 0.600  
0.630  
GAGE PLANE  
E1 12.70 13.72 14.48 0.500 0.540 0.570  
e
1.78  
0.070  
0.600  
eA  
eB  
eC  
L
15.24  
eC  
18.54  
0.730  
0.060  
eB  
1.52 0.000  
2.54 3.30 3.56 0.100 0.130 0.140  
Number of Pins  
N
42  
Figure 104. THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Notes:  
1. The power dissipation is obtained from the formula P =P +P  
where P  
is the chip internal power (I xV  
)
D
INT  
PORT  
INT  
DD DD  
141/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Package thermal resistance (junction to ambient)  
TQFP64  
Value  
Unit  
60  
45  
52  
55  
R
SDIP56  
TQFP44  
SDIP42  
°C/W  
thJA  
1)  
P
Power dissipation  
Maximum junction temperature  
500  
150  
mW  
°C  
D
2)  
T
Jmax  
and P  
is the port power dissipation determined by the user.  
PORT  
2. The average chip-junction temperature can be obtained from the formula T = T + P x RthJA.  
J
A
D
142/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
17.2 SOLDERING AND GLUEABILITY INFORMATION  
Recommended soldering information given only  
as design guidelines in Figure 105 and Figure 106.  
Recommended glue for SMD plastic packages  
dedicated to molding compound with silicone:  
Heraeus: PD945, PD955  
Loctite: 3615, 3298  
Figure 105. Recommended Wave Soldering Profile (with 37% Sn and 63% Pb)  
250  
COOLING PHASE  
(ROOM TEMPERATURE)  
5 sec  
200  
150  
100  
50  
SOLDERING  
PHASE  
80°C  
Temp. [°C]  
PREHEATING  
PHASE  
Time [sec]  
0
20  
60  
40  
80  
100  
140  
120  
160  
Figure 106. Recommended Reflow Soldering Oven Profile (MID JEDEC)  
250  
Tmax=220+/-5°C  
for 25 sec  
200  
150  
100  
50  
150 sec above 183°C  
90 sec at 125°C  
Temp. [°C]  
ramp down natural  
2°C/sec max  
ramp up  
2°C/sec for 50sec  
Time [sec]  
0
100  
200  
300  
400  
143/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
18 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION  
Each device is available for production in user pro-  
grammable versions (FLASH) as well as in factory  
coded versions (ROM). E PROM data memory  
and FLASH devices are shipped to customers with  
a default content (FFh), while ROM factory coded  
parts contain the code supplied by the customer.  
This implies that FLASH devices have to be con-  
figured by the customer using the Option Bytes  
while the ROM devices are factory-configured.  
USER OPTION BYTE 1  
Bit 7 = CSS Clock Security System disable  
This option bit enables or disables the CSS fea-  
tures.  
0: CSS enabled  
2
1: CSS disabled  
Bit 6:4 = OSC[2:0] Oscillator selection  
These three option bits can be used to select the  
main oscillator as shown in Table 24.  
Bit 3:2 = LVD[1:0] Low voltage detection selection  
These option bits enable the LVD block with a se-  
lected threshold as shown in Table 25.  
18.1 OPTION BYTES  
The two option bytes allow the hardware configu-  
ration of the microcontroller to be selected.  
The option bytes have no address in the memory  
map and can be accessed only in programming  
mode (for example using a standard ST7 program-  
ming tool). The default content of the FLASH is  
fixed to FFh.  
In masked ROM devices, the option bytes are  
fixed in hardware by the ROM code (see option  
list).  
Bit 1 = WDG HALT Watchdog Reset on HALTt  
mode  
This option bit determines if a RESET is generated  
when entering HALT mode while the Watchdog is  
active.  
0: No Reset generation when entering Halt mode  
1: Reset generation when entering Halt mode  
Bit 0 = WDG SW Hardware or software watchdog  
This option bit selects the watchdog type.  
0: Hardware (watchdog always enabled)  
USER OPTION BYTE 0  
1: Software (watchdog to be enabled by software)  
Table 24. Main Oscillator Configuration  
Bit 7:2 = Reserved, must always be 1.  
Bit 1 = 56/42 Package Configuration.  
This option bit allows to configured the device ac-  
cording to the package.  
0: 42 or 44 pin packages  
1: 56 or 64 pin packages  
Selected Oscillator  
External Clock (Stand-by)  
~4 MHz Internal RC  
OSC2 OSC1 OSC0  
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
X
1
0
1
0
1~14 MHz External RC  
Bit 0 = FMP Full memory protection.  
This option bit enables or disables external access  
to the internal program memory (read-out protec-  
tion). Clearing this bit causes the erasing (by over-  
writing with the currently latched values) of the  
whole memory (not including the option bytes).  
0: Program memory not read-out protected  
1: Program memory read-out protected  
Low Power Resonator (LP)  
Medium Power Resonator (MP)  
Medium Speed Resonator (MS)  
High Speed Resonator (HS)  
Table 25. LVD Threshold Configuration  
Note: The data E2PROM is not protected by this  
bit in flash devices. In ROM devices, a protection  
can be selected in the Option List (see page 146).  
Configuration  
LVD1 LVD0  
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
LVD Off  
Highest Voltage Threshold ( 4.50V)  
Medium Voltage Threshold ( 4.05V)  
Lowest Voltage Threshold ( 3.45V)  
USER OPTION BYTE 0  
USER OPTION BYTE 1  
7
0
7
0
OSC OSC OSC  
WDG WDG  
HALT SW  
Reserved  
56/42 FMP CSS  
LVD1 LVD0  
2
1
0
Default  
Value  
1
1
1
1
1
1
X
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
144/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION (Cont’d)  
18.2 TRANSFER OF CUSTOMER CODE  
Customer code is made up of the ROM contents  
and the list of the selected options (if any). The  
ROM contents are to be sent on diskette, or by  
electronic means, with the hexadecimal file in .S19  
format generated by the development tool. All un-  
used bytes must be set to FFh.  
The selected options are communicated to STMi-  
croelectronics using the correctly completed OP-  
TION LIST appended.  
The STMicroelectronics Sales Organization will be  
pleased to provide detailed information on con-  
tractual points.  
Figure 107. ROM Factory Coded Device Types  
TEMP.  
PACKAGE RANGE  
/
XXX  
DEVICE  
Code name (defined by STMicroelectronics)  
1 = standard 0 to +70 °C  
6 = industrial -40 to +85 °C  
7 = automotive -40 to +105 °C  
3 = automotive -40 to +125 °C  
B = Plastic DIP  
T = Plastic TQFP  
ST72334J2, ST72334J4, ST72334N2, ST72334N4,  
ST72314J2, ST72314J4, ST72314N2, ST72314N4,  
ST72124J2  
Figure 108. FLASH User Programmable Device Types  
TEMP.  
PACKAGE RANGE  
DEVICE  
XXX  
Code name (defined by STMicroelectronics)  
1 = standard 0 to +70 °C  
6 = industrial -40 to +85 °C  
7 = automotive -40 to +105 °C  
3 = automotive -40 to +125 °C  
B = Plastic DIP  
T = Plastic TQFP  
ST72C334J2, ST72C334J4, ST72C334N2, ST72C334N4,  
ST72C314J2, ST72C314J4, ST72C314N2, ST72C314N4,  
ST72C124J2  
145/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
MICROCONTROLLER OPTION LIST  
Customer:  
Address:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Contact:  
Phone No:  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Reference/ROM code*:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
*The ROM or FASTROM code name is assigned by STMicroelectronics.  
ROM or FASTROM code must be sent in .S19 format. .Hex extension cannot be processed.  
STMicroelectronics references  
ROM Type/Memory Size/Package (check only 1 option):  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
ROM DEVICE:  
|
8K  
|
16K  
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
SDIP42:  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72124J2B  
[ ] ST72314J2B  
[ ] ST72334J2B  
[ ] ST72124J2T  
[ ] ST72314J2T  
[ ] ST72334J2T  
[ ] ST72314N2B  
[ ] ST72334N2B  
[ ] ST72314N2T  
[ ] ST72334N2T  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72314J4B  
[ ] ST72334J4B  
TQFP44:  
[ ] ST72314J4T  
[ ] ST72334J4T  
[ ] ST72314N4B  
[ ] ST72334N4B  
[ ] ST72314N4T  
[ ] ST72334N4T  
SDIP56:  
TQFP64:  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
FASTROM DEVICE:| 8K 16K  
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
SDIP42:  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72P124J2B |  
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
[ ] ST72P314J2B | [ ] ST72P314J4B  
[ ] ST72P334J2B | [ ] ST72P334J4B  
[ ] ST72P124J2T |  
[ ] ST72P314J2T | [ ] ST72P314J4T  
[ ] ST72P334J2T | [ ] ST72P334J4T  
[ ] ST72P314N2B | [ ] ST72P314N4B  
[ ] ST72P334N2B | [ ] ST72P334N4B  
[ ] ST72P314N2T | [ ] ST72P314N4T  
[ ] ST72P334N2T | [ ] ST72P334N4T  
TQFP44:  
SDIP56:  
TQFP64:  
Conditioning (specify for TQFP only):  
Marking: [ ] Standard marking  
[ ] Tape & Reel  
[ ] Special marking (ROM only):  
[ ] Tray  
TQFP (10 char. max) : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
SDIP (16 char. max) : _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
Authorized characters are letters, digits, '.', '-', '/' and spaces only.  
Please consult your local STMicroelectronics sales office for other marking details if required.  
Temperature Range: [ ] 0°C to +70°C  
[ ] -40°C to +85°C  
[ ] -40°C to +105°C  
[ ] -40°C to +125°C  
Clock Source Selection:  
Resonator:  
[ ] LP: Low power resonator (1 to 2 MHz)  
[ ] MP: Medium power resonator (2 to 4 MHz)  
[ ] MS: Medium speed resonator (4 to 8 MHz)  
[ ] HS: High speed resonator (8 to 16 MHz)  
[ ] Internal  
[ ]  
RC Network:  
External Clock:  
[ ] External  
Clock Security System:  
LVD Reset:  
[ ] Disabled  
[ ] Disabled  
[ ] Enabled  
[ ] Enabled:  
[ ] Highest threshold  
[ ] Medium threshold  
[ ] Lowest threshold  
Watchdog Selection:  
Watchdog Reset on Halt:  
[ ] Software Activation  
[ ] Reset  
[ ] Hardware Activation  
[ ] No reset  
Program Readout Protection:  
Data E2PROM Readout Protection*:  
*available on ST72334 only  
[ ] Disabled  
[ ] Disabled  
[ ] Enabled  
[ ] Enabled  
Comments:  
Supply Operating Range in the application:  
Notes:  
Date:  
Signature:  
146/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
18.3 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS  
STMicroelectronics offers a range of hardware  
and software development tools for the ST7 micro-  
controller family. Full details of tools available for  
the ST7 from third party manufacturers can be ob-  
tain from the STMicroelectronics Internet site:  
http//mcu.st.com.  
Tools from these manufacturers include C compli-  
ers, emulators and gang programmers.  
STMicroelectronics Tools  
Three types of development tool are offered by  
ST, all of them connect to a PC via a parallel (LPT)  
port: see Table 26 and Table 27 for more details.  
Table 26. STMicroelectronics Tool Features  
1)  
In-Circuit Emulation  
Programming Capability  
Software Included  
ST7 CD ROM with:  
Yes. (Same features as  
ST7 Development Kit  
ST7 HDS2 Emulator  
HDS2 emulator but without Yes (DIP packages only)  
logic analyzer)  
– ST7 Assembly toolchain  
– STVD7 and WGDB7 powerful  
Source Level Debugger for Win  
3.1, Win 95 and NT  
– C compiler demo versions  
– ST Realizer for Win 3.1 and Win  
95.  
Yes, powerful emulation  
features including trace/  
logic analyzer  
No  
ST7 Programming Board  
No  
Yes (All packages)  
– Windows Programming Tools  
for Win 3.1, Win 95 and NT  
Table 27. Dedicated STMicroelectronics Development Tools  
Supported Products  
ST7 Development Kit  
ST7 HDS2 Emulator  
ST7 Programming Board  
ST72(C)334J2,  
ST72(C)334J4,  
ST72(C)334N2,  
ST72(C)334N4,  
ST72(C)314J2,  
ST72(C)314J4,  
ST72(C)314N2,  
ST72(C)314N4,  
ST72(C)124J2  
ST7MDT2-EPB2/EU  
ST7MDT2-EPB2/US  
ST7MDT2-EPB2/UK  
ST7MDT2-DVP2  
ST7MDT2-EMU2B  
Note:  
1. In-Situ Programming (ISP) interface for FLASH devices.  
147/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
DEVELOPMENT TOOLS (Cont’d)  
18.3.1 Suggested List Of Socket Types  
Table 28. Suggested List of TQFP64 Socket Types  
Package / Probe  
TQFP64  
EMU PROBE  
Adaptor / Socket Reference  
Socket type  
Open Top  
ENPLAS  
OTQ-64-0.8-02  
YAMAICHI  
YAMAICHI  
IC51-0644-1240.KS-14584  
IC149-064-008-S5  
Clamshell  
SMC  
Suggested List of TQFP44 Socket Types  
Package / Probe  
TQFP44  
Adaptor / Socket Reference  
OTQ-44-0.8-04  
Socket type  
ENPLAS  
Open Top  
Clamshell  
YAMAICHI  
IC51-0444-467-KS-11787  
TQFP44  
EMU PROBE  
YAMAICHI  
IC149-044-*52-S5  
SMC  
148/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
18.4 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES  
IDENTIFICATION  
DESCRIPTION  
EXAMPLE DRIVERS  
AN 969  
AN 970  
AN 971  
AN 972  
AN 973  
AN 974  
AN 976  
AN 979  
AN 980  
AN1017  
AN1041  
AN1042  
AN1044  
AN1045  
AN1046  
AN1047  
AN1048  
AN1078  
AN1082  
AN1083  
AN1105  
AN1129  
SCI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND PC  
SPI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN ST7 AND EEPROM  
I²C COMMUNICATING BETWEEN ST7 AND M24CXX EEPROM  
ST7 SOFTWARE SPI MASTER COMMUNICATION  
SCI SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION WITH A PC USING ST72251 16-BIT TIMER  
REAL TIME CLOCK WITH ST7 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE  
DRIVING A BUZZER THROUGH ST7 TIMER PWM FUNCTION  
DRIVING AN ANALOG KEYBOARD WITH THE ST7 ADC  
ST7 KEYPAD DECODING TECHNIQUES, IMPLEMENTING WAKE-UP ON KEYSTROKE  
USING THE ST7 UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS MICROCONTROLLER  
USING ST7 PWM SIGNAL TO GENERATE ANALOG OUTPUT (SINUSOID)  
ST7 ROUTINE FOR I²C SLAVE MODE MANAGEMENT  
MULTIPLE INTERRUPT SOURCES MANAGEMENT FOR ST7 MCUS  
ST7 S/W IMPLEMENTATION OF I²C BUS MASTER  
UART EMULATION SOFTWARE  
MANAGING RECEPTION ERRORS WITH THE ST7 SCI PERIPHERALS  
ST7 SOFTWARE LCD DRIVER  
PWM DUTY CYCLE SWITCH IMPLEMENTING TRUE 0% & 100% DUTY CYCLE  
DESCRIPTION OF THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL PERIPHERAL REGISTERS  
ST72141 BLDC MOTOR CONTROL SOFTWARE AND FLOWCHART EXAMPLE  
ST7 PCAN PERIPHERAL DRIVER  
PERMANENT MAGNET DC MOTOR DRIVE.  
AN INTRODUCTION TO SENSORLESS BRUSHLESS DC MOTOR DRIVE APPLICATIONS  
WITH THE ST72141  
AN1130  
AN1148  
AN1149  
AN1180  
AN1276  
AN1321  
AN1325  
AN1445  
AN1475  
AN1504  
USING THE ST7263 FOR DESIGNING A USB MOUSE  
HANDLING SUSPEND MODE ON A USB MOUSE  
USING THE ST7263 KIT TO IMPLEMENT A USB GAME PAD  
BLDC MOTOR START ROUTINE FOR THE ST72141 MICROCONTROLLER  
USING THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL MCU IN SENSOR MODE  
USING THE ST7 USB LOW-SPEED FIRMWARE V4.X  
USING THE ST7 SPI TO EMULATE A 16-BIT SLAVE  
DEVELOPING AN ST7265X MASS STORAGE APPLICATION  
STARTING A PWM SIGNAL DIRECTLY AT HIGH LEVEL USING THE ST7 16-BIT TIMER  
PRODUCT EVALUATION  
AN 910  
AN 990  
AN1077  
AN1086  
AN1150  
AN1151  
AN1278  
PERFORMANCE BENCHMARKING  
ST7 BENEFITS VERSUS INDUSTRY STANDARD  
OVERVIEW OF ENHANCED CAN CONTROLLERS FOR ST7 AND ST9 MCUS  
U435 CAN-DO SOLUTIONS FOR CAR MULTIPLEXING  
BENCHMARK ST72 VS PC16  
PERFORMANCE COMPARISON BETWEEN ST72254 & PC16F876  
LIN (LOCAL INTERCONNECT NETWORK) SOLUTIONS  
PRODUCT MIGRATION  
AN1131  
AN1322  
AN1365  
MIGRATING APPLICATIONS FROM ST72511/311/214/124 TO ST72521/321/324  
MIGRATING AN APPLICATION FROM ST7263 REV.B TO ST7263B  
GUIDELINES FOR MIGRATING ST72C254 APPLICATION TO ST72F264  
PRODUCT OPTIMIZATION  
149/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
IDENTIFICATION  
DESCRIPTION  
AN 982  
AN1014  
AN1015  
AN1040  
AN1070  
AN1324  
AN1477  
AN1502  
AN1529  
USING ST7 WITH CERAMIC RESONATOR  
HOW TO MINIMIZE THE ST7 POWER CONSUMPTION  
SOFTWARE TECHNIQUES FOR IMPROVING MICROCONTROLLER EMC PERFORMANCE  
MONITORING THE VBUS SIGNAL FOR USB SELF-POWERED DEVICES  
ST7 CHECKSUM SELF-CHECKING CAPABILITY  
CALIBRATING THE RC OSCILLATOR OF THE ST7FLITE0 MCU USING THE MAINS  
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH XFLASH MEMORY  
EMULATED DATA EEPROM WITH ST7 HDFLASH MEMORY  
EXTENDING THE CURRENT & VOLTAGE CAPABILITY ON THE ST7265 VDDF SUPPLY  
ACCURATE TIMEBASE FOR LOW-COST ST7 APPLICATIONS WITH INTERNAL RC OSCIL-  
LATOR  
AN1530  
PROGRAMMING AND TOOLS  
AN 978  
AN 983  
AN 985  
AN 986  
AN 987  
AN 988  
AN 989  
AN1039  
AN1064  
AN1071  
AN1106  
KEY FEATURES OF THE STVD7 ST7 VISUAL DEBUG PACKAGE  
KEY FEATURES OF THE COSMIC ST7 C-COMPILER PACKAGE  
EXECUTING CODE IN ST7 RAM  
USING THE INDIRECT ADDRESSING MODE WITH ST7  
ST7 SERIAL TEST CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING  
STARTING WITH ST7 ASSEMBLY TOOL CHAIN  
GETTING STARTED WITH THE ST7 HIWARE C TOOLCHAIN  
ST7 MATH UTILITY ROUTINES  
WRITING OPTIMIZED HIWARE C LANGUAGE FOR ST7  
HALF DUPLEX USB-TO-SERIAL BRIDGE USING THE ST72611 USB MICROCONTROLLER  
TRANSLATING ASSEMBLY CODE FROM HC05 TO ST7  
PROGRAMMING ST7 FLASH MICROCONTROLLERS IN REMOTE ISP MODE (IN-SITU PRO-  
GRAMMING)  
AN1179  
AN1446  
AN1478  
AN1527  
AN1575  
USING THE ST72521 EMULATOR TO DEBUG A ST72324 TARGET APPLICATION  
PORTING AN ST7 PANTA PROJECT TO CODEWARRIOR IDE  
DEVELOPING A USB SMARTCARD READER WITH ST7SCR  
ON-BOARD PROGRAMMING METHODS FOR XFLASH AND HDFLASH ST7 MCUS  
150/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
19 IMPORTANT NOTES  
19.1 SCI Baud rate registers  
Caution: The SCI baud rate register (SCIBRR)  
MUST NOT be written to (changed or refreshed)  
while the transmitter or the receiver is enabled.  
151/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
20 SUMMARY OF CHANGES  
Description of the changes between the current release of the specification and the previous one.  
Revision  
Main changes  
Date  
Replaced Note by Caution in “Conventional Baud Rate Generation” on page 91  
Changed Watchdog and Halt mode Option to read “Watchdog reset on Halt” in Section 18  
Please read carefully the Section “IMPORTANT NOTES” on page 151  
2.5  
April-03  
152/153  
ST72334J/N, ST72314J/N, ST72124J  
Notes:  
Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, STMicroelectronics assumes no responsibility for the consequences  
of use of such information nor for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted  
by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of STMicroelectronics. Specifications mentioned in this publication are subject  
to change without notice. This publication supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied. STMicroelectronics products are not  
authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems without the express written approval of STMicroelectronics.  
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics  
2003 STMicroelectronics - All Rights Reserved.  
Purchase of I2C Components by STMicroelectronics conveys a license under the Philips I2C Patent. Rights to use these components in an  
I2C system is granted provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as defined by Philips.  
STMicroelectronics Group of Companies  
Australia - Brazil - Canada - China - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Israel - Italy - Japan  
Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Singapore - Spain - Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - U.S.A.  
http://www.st.com  
153/153  

相关型号:

ST72P334J4T

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72P334N2B

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72P334N2T

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72P334N4B

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72P334N4T

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, SCI INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72P361AR4TA

8-BIT, FLASH, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, PLASTIC, TQFP-64
STMICROELECTR

ST72P361AR4TA/XXX

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, LQFP-64
STMICROELECTR

ST72P361AR4TA/XXXE

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, LQFP-64
STMICROELECTR

ST72P361AR4TA/XXXR

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, LQFP-64
STMICROELECTR

ST72P361AR4TA/XXXRE

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, LQFP-64
STMICROELECTR
STMICROELECTR

ST72P361AR4TA/XXXS

8-BIT, MROM, 8MHz, MICROCONTROLLER, PQFP64, 10 X 10 MM, ROHS COMPLIANT, LQFP-64
STMICROELECTR